JP6145805B2 - Game equipment - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus.

  In a game arcade where a plurality of gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and revolving type gaming machines are installed, it is common that a gaming device for receiving information output from the gaming machine is provided (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-244338 A

  However, in the gaming apparatus described in the above-mentioned patent document, input to the gaming machine is not performed based on information received from the gaming machine.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming apparatus that can input to a gaming machine based on information received from the gaming machine.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, the invention described in claim 1 is directed to information output from a gaming machine that executes a specific effect when an input is received by an input receiving unit provided at a position where the player is difficult or impossible to operate. In the gaming apparatus for receiving, the input means for inputting to the input receiving unit, the determining means for determining whether or not specific information that triggers the input is received, and the specific information is received Input execution means for causing the input means to perform input based on the determination.

In addition to the above, according to the first aspect of the present invention, the gaming device receives information output from a plurality of gaming machines, and a plurality of the input means are provided so as to correspond to each of the plurality of gaming machines. The input execution means causes at least the input means corresponding to the gaming machine that has output the specific information to input.

According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming apparatus according to the first aspect, the game apparatus further comprises a classification unit that classifies a plurality of gaming machines into any of a plurality of groups, and the input execution unit outputs the specific information. It is characterized in that the input means corresponding to the gaming machines classified into the group to which the gaming machines belong are input all at once.

According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming device according to the first or second aspect, the input execution means has different inputs to the input means according to the type of the specific information collected from the gaming machines. It is characterized by making it carry out.

  According to the gaming apparatus of the present invention, it is possible to input to the gaming machine based on information received from the gaming machine.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a back view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a control block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the game flow of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control apparatus of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of a sub control device of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the input process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage determination processing of a main control apparatus. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot determination table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a special figure stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the usual game process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game information update process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game information output setting process of a main control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the game information signal output from an external output terminal board. It is a figure which shows the detail of the information classification signal and numerical information signal which are output from an external output terminal board. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting special game information at the time of winning a game ball to a normal start port. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting special game information at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting special game information at the time of the start of the change display of the special symbol based on the 1st special figure reservation. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting special game information from the opening of the jackpot game to the first round. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting special game information during the jackpot game interval period. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting special game information during the ending period of jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the output form of special game information. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game effect process of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the general game effect process of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect execution process of a sub control apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the completion | finish condition determination table for pachinko. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of a prefetch special effect. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example of the prefetch special effect in FIG. 32. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of an effect of the prefetch special effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the special effect during a fluctuation | variation. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of an error special effect. It is a perspective view showing an example of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the input of a slot machine, control, and an output. 10 is a flowchart showing slot machine activation processing. It is a flowchart which shows 1 game processing of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze production process of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation process of a slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel stop process of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the payout process of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the game information output setting process of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the game information signal output by the information output means of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the detail of the information classification signal and numerical information signal which are output by the information output means of a slot machine. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting special game information when the operation of the start switch of the slot machine is detected. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting special game information when the slot machine is controlled to be frozen. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting special game information when the right reel is finally stopped in the slot machine and a small winning combination is generated. It is a flowchart which shows the production control processing of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect execution process of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the completion | finish condition determination table for slots. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of a prior special effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of an effect of the prior special effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the special effect during a fluctuation | variation. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the special effect during fluctuation in FIG. 57. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of an error special effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the output form of the special game information of a slot machine. It is a system configuration figure of a game system. It is a control block diagram of the game device in the game system. It is a functional block diagram of a game system. It is a flowchart which shows the menu process of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the gaming machine information setting page in the menu screen displayed on the HC display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the special effect setting page in the menu screen displayed on HC display device. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect process 1 of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the progress data for pachinko memorize | stored in the hard disk of a hall computer. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead special effect determination table for pachinko, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation special effect determination table for pachinko, (c) is an error special for pachinko It is a figure which shows an example of an effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect process 2 of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the progress data for slots memorize | stored in the hard disk of a hall computer. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the prior special effect table for slots, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the special effect determination table for a slot, and (c) is an error special effect for slots. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the information input device drive process of an island computer.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Basic configuration of pachinko machine>
First, a basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1 which is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment and FIG. 2 which is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (ball-type game machine) is opened and closed in the left-right direction via a rectangular frame-shaped outer frame 2 to which a decorative plate 2a is attached at the lower front and a first hinge 3 on the front side of the outer frame 2 The inner frame 4 that is pivotally attached as possible, the game board 5 that is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 with the game area 5a formed on the front side facing forward, and the front surface of the game board 5 are covered. As described above, a glass frame 7 is provided on the front side of the inner frame 4 so as to be pivotable so as to be opened and closed in the left-right direction via the second hinge portion 6.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, the frame open detection switch 7 a for detecting the open / closed state of the inner frame 4 and the glass frame 7, the inner frame 4 is held in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2, and the inner frame 4, a locking device 8 for holding the glass frame 7 in a closed state, and a launching device 30 (see FIG. 3) having a launching solenoid for launching a game ball (game medium) toward the game area 5a. Is provided.

  The locking device 8 normally holds the inner frame 4 and the glass frame 7 in a closed state, but when a dedicated key is inserted into a key hole facing the front of the glass frame 7 and rotated in one direction, When the inner frame 4 is unlocked and rotated in the other direction, the inner frame 4 and the glass frame 7 are unlocked.

  An opening 9 that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion of the glass frame 7, and a transparent member 10 (a tempered glass plate or an acrylic plate) is attached so as to close the opening 9 from the rear. The game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the inner frame 4 via the part 9 and the transparent member 10 is visible.

  On the front side of the glass frame 7, a speaker 12 for outputting a predetermined effect sound, a frame light emitting unit 13 for performing a light emission effect in a predetermined light emission mode, and a rotation light emission effect by rotating the reflector plate The rotating light-emitting unit 14, the frame display 15 for performing display effects in a predetermined display mode, the upper tray unit 17 for storing game balls paid out from the payout device 85, and the upper tray unit. A lower tray unit 27 for storing game balls that can no longer be filled and a launch handle 31 for performing a launch operation of the game balls are provided.

  On the upper left side of the upper plate unit 17, there is provided an upper plate 18 that stores the game balls paid out through the upper plate discharge outlet 18 a and whose bottom surface is inclined downward toward the launching handle 31. The game balls that have flowed down the upper plate 18 are supplied to the launching device 30 one by one by a ball feeding device (not shown) provided at the end of the inclination. Note that the number of game balls supplied to the launching device 30 by the ball feeder and the number of game balls launched by the launching device 30 are approximately 100 per minute.

  On the upper right side of the upper plate unit 17 is adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the upper plate ball removing button 19 for performing the ball removing operation for extracting the game balls stored in the upper plate 18 to the lower plate unit 27. A balance display unit 20 for displaying the balance of the valuable value input by the player on the lending device installed in the island facility, and a ball lending button 21 for performing a lending operation for renting game balls in exchange for the valuable value A return button 22 for performing a return operation for discharging a storage medium (card, coin, etc.) in which the balance of the valuable value is stored from the lending device, and a selection operation by an employee or player of the game hall A selection button device 23 is provided.

  The selection button device 23 is operated among the selection buttons, the selection button 24 having a cross key shape for the player to perform the selection operation up, down, left and right, the selection button switch 24a for detecting the operation on the selection button 24, and the selection buttons. A selection button LED 24b that emits a button is provided so that employees and players of the game arcade can make selection inputs to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Near the center front of the upper plate unit 17, there is provided an inclined surface portion that is inclined downward from the front end portion of the upper plate 18 toward the player side. In the central portion of the inclined surface portion, employees and players of the game hall are provided. An effect button device 25 for performing a determination operation is provided.

  The effect button device 25 emits a circular effect button 26 for a player to perform a determination operation, an effect button switch 26a for detecting an operation on the effect button 26, and an effect button 26 for which the operation is enabled. An effect button LED 26b and an effect button drive motor 26c for moving the effect button 26 in the vertical direction are provided, so that employees and players of the game hall can make a decision input to the pachinko gaming machine 1. ing.

  On the left side of the lower tray unit 27, there is a lower tray 28 for storing game balls guided from the upper tray 18 to the lower tray discharge outlet 28a, and a game ball stored in the lower tray 28 below the lower tray 28 ( A lower tray ball removal button 29 is provided for performing a ball removal operation for removal outside the gaming machine.

  The firing handle 31 includes a handle base 32 projecting forward of the glass frame 7, a firing operation unit 33 rotatably supported by the handle base 32, and a player's hand on the handle base 32 or the firing operation unit 33. A touch sensor 33a (not shown) for detecting touching and a launch stop switch 34 for performing a stop operation for stopping the launch of the game ball by the launch device 30 are provided.

  A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 for partitioning the game area 5a into a substantially circular shape are provided near the outer edge of the front surface of the game board 5, and a launching device is provided between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail. A ball guide path 37 is formed to guide the game ball fired by 30 from the lower left end of the game board 5 to the upper left part of the game area 5a, and at the ball exit of the ball guide path 37, the game that has entered the game area 5a is formed. A ball return prevention valve 38 for preventing the ball from returning to the ball guide path 37 is provided.

  An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is formed substantially at the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped decoration frame 39 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the interior is arranged so as to decorate the periphery of the opening. An effect space 40 is formed inside the decorative frame 39.

  A warp device 41 that guides a game ball flowing down the right region of the game area 5 a to the inside of the decoration frame is provided at a side portion of the decoration frame 39, and an introduction port 41 a through which the game ball flows into the warp device 41 is provided. A lead-out port 41 b that opens toward the game area 5 a and flows out the game ball that has flowed into the warp device 41 opens toward the bottom of the decoration frame 39.

  At the bottom of the decoration frame 39, a stage portion 42 is provided for causing the game ball guided by the warp device 41 to roll in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction and then flow down to the game area 5a below the decoration frame 39. ing.

  In the lower area of the game area 5a, a normal winning opening 44 (winning area) where a game ball can be won in a normal state, a first start opening 45 (first start winning area) where a game ball can be won in a normal state, A second start opening 46 (second start winning area) that can be converted into a closed state where the game ball cannot be won and an open state where the game ball can be won is provided.

  The normal winning opening 44 is provided with a normal winning opening switch 44a for detecting a game ball won in the normal winning opening 44, and when a gaming ball won in the normal winning opening 44 is detected by the normal winning opening switch 44a, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 85 to the upper plate 18 as prize balls.

  The first start port 45 is provided with a first start port switch 45a for detecting a game ball won in the first start port 45, and the game ball won in the first start port 45 is detected by the first start port switch 45a. When detected, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 85 to the upper plate 18 as prize balls. Moreover, the 1st right for performing the jackpot lottery (change display of the 1st special symbol) mentioned later is provided.

  The second starting port 46 includes a second starting port switch 46a for detecting a game ball won in the second starting port 46, an opening / closing piece 47 for opening and closing the second starting port 46, and a hit determination described later. A game in which the opening / closing piece 47 is operated to convert the second start port 46 from the closed state to the open state and the second start port 46 is won. When the ball is detected by the second start port switch 46a, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 85 to the upper plate 18 as prize balls. Moreover, the 2nd right for performing the jackpot lottery (change display of a 2nd special symbol) mentioned later is provided.

  A windmill 48 is provided in the lower left area of the game area 5a to change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the left side of the decoration frame 39. The windmill 48 flows down the left side of the decoration frame 39 below the windmill 48. A left guiding portion 49 is provided for guiding the game ball toward the normal winning port 44 and the second starting port 46.

  In the upper right area of the game area 5a, a buffer member 50 (rubber, urethane, etc.) for dampening the momentum of the game ball that has passed through the upper edge of the game area 5a along the outer rail 36 (so-called right hit) And the game ball colliding with the buffer member 50 flows down to the right side of the decorative frame 39. Note that the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the decoration frame 39 is prevented from winning the first start opening 45 because the flow direction is restricted by the game nail.

  In the lower right area of the game area 5 a, the normal gate 51 (third start area) through which the game ball can normally pass, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the decoration frame 39 are directed toward the general gate 51. The upper right guiding section 52 to be guided, the normal winning port 44 (winning area) in which a game ball can be won in a normal state, and a change that is converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win and an open state in which the game ball can win A winning device 53 and a right downstream guiding portion 56 that guides the game ball that has flowed down without winning the normal winning port 44 or the variable winning device 53 toward the second starting port 46 are provided.

  The usual figure gate 51 is provided with a gate switch 51a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the usual figure gate 51. When a game ball that has passed through the usual figure gate is detected by the gate switch 51a, a hit determination (described later) The third right to execute the normal symbol variation display) is granted.

  The variable winning device 53 has a large winning opening 54 (a winning area) through which the game ball can be won with a wider opening than the normal winning opening 44, and a large winning for detecting the gaming ball winning the winning prize 54. The mouth switch 54a, the opening / closing member 55 for opening / closing the grand prize winning port 54, and the opening / closing member 55 are operated when the result of the jackpot lottery described later is a big hit, so that the big prize winning port 54 is changed from the closed state to the open state. A prize winning solenoid 55a for conversion is provided, and when a game ball won in the prize winning port 54 is detected by the prize winning switch 54a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball 85. Is paid out to the upper plate 18.

  At the most downstream portion of the game area 5a, the game balls that have flowed down without winning any of the normal winning port 44, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 46, and the big winning port are discharged from the gaming region 5a. For this purpose, an out port 57 is provided.

  On the outside of the game area 5a, a game information display device 59 for displaying information that allows the player to grasp the progress of the game so that the player can visually recognize it through the opening 9 of the glass frame 7 and the transparent member 10. Is provided.

  The game information display device 59 includes a first special symbol display 60, a first special symbol hold indicator 61, a second special symbol indicator 62, a second special symbol hold indicator 63, and a normal symbol indicator. 64, a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, a short-time gaming state display 68, and a high probability gaming state display 69 (see FIG. 3).

  The first special symbol display 60 is composed of, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and the first special symbol display 60 is based on the fact that the big hit lottery is performed based on the first right given by winning the game ball to the first start opening 45. A special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and display modes (such as a lost special symbol, a big bonus special symbol, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery are stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variation time.

  The first special symbol hold indicator 61 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and the jackpot lottery (change display of the first special symbol) is not executed (held) depending on the lighting mode (lit, flashing, extinguished). The number of first rights is displayed as the first special figure reservation number.

  The second special symbol display 62 is composed of, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol display 62 is based on the fact that the big hit lottery is performed based on the second right given by winning the game ball to the second starting port 46. A special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and display modes (such as a lost special symbol, a big bonus special symbol, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery are stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variation time.

  The second special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and the jackpot lottery (the variation display of the second special symbol) is not executed (held) depending on the lighting mode (lit, flashing, extinguished). The number of second rights is displayed as the second special figure reservation number.

  The normal symbol display 64 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and the normal symbol fluctuates due to the fact that the winning lottery is performed based on the third right granted by the passing of the game ball to the general gate 51. The display mode (losing display mode, winning display mode, etc.) indicating the result of the winning lottery is displayed after the change time has elapsed.

  The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and the third lottery of which the lottery (ordinary symbol change display) is not executed (held) depending on the lighting mode (lit, flashing, extinguished). The number is displayed as a general figure hold number.

  The number-of-rounds indicator 66 varies over a predetermined number of rounds because the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot and the jackpot special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 62. The number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) for converting the winning device 53 from the closed state to the open state is executed is displayed.

  When the right-handed indicator 67 needs to perform a right-handed shot to launch a game ball while aiming at the right area of the game area 5a such as during a jackpot game or during a short-time game state (a general power support state) described later, Right-handed information that prompts right-handedness is displayed.

  The time-short game state display 68 displays time-shortage information indicating that the time-short game state is in a time-short game state described later. The high probability gaming state display 69 displays high probability information indicating that the probability variation gaming state is in the probability variation gaming state described later.

  A first image display device 71 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the interior of the effect space 40, and the first image display device 71 is provided between the stage unit 42 and the first image display device 71. A second image display device 72 (main liquid crystal) composed of a smaller liquid crystal display is provided so as to be movable (operable) in front of the first image display device 71. The first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72 may be a transmissive liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, an EL display, or the like.

  In the first image display device 71 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device, three rows of effect symbols (left symbol Z1, middle symbol Z2) in conjunction with the change display and stop display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , The right symbol Z3) is displayed in a variable manner and stopped, and a warning image (character image, information image, background image) or the like for notifying that there is a possibility that a special jackpot symbol (a jackpot effect symbol) may be displayed is displayed. A variable display effect is executed.

  There are a plurality of types of production symbols including at least one of numbers (0 to 9 etc.), alphabets (A to F, etc.), characters, etc., so that they can be distinguished (identified) from other types of production symbols. Therefore, it can be paraphrased as identification information.

  The variation display of the effect symbol is performed by changing the type of the effect symbol displayed on the effective line while scrolling the effect symbol in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction or rotating on the spot. The stop display of the effect symbol is performed by stopping and displaying a display mode (losing effect symbol, jackpot effect symbol) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery on the active line for a predetermined time.

  The display mode of the jackpot effect symbol is configured by a combination of the same effect symbol such as “777” or a combination of effect symbols having a predetermined regularity such as “753”. Is composed of a combination of different effects.

  The first image display device 71 also includes a first icon display area 71a for displaying a hold icon corresponding to the first right that has not been executed (holded) in the jackpot lottery (change display of the first special symbol). The second icon display area 71b for displaying the hold icon corresponding to the second right for which the big hit lottery (the change display of the second special symbol) has not been executed (held), and the special symbol change display are executed. An execution icon display area 71c for displaying an execution icon corresponding to the first right or the second right is provided.

  Note that at least one of the first icon display area 71a, the second icon display area 71b, and the execution icon display area 71c may be provided in the second image display device 72, or the first icon display area 71a and the second icon display. At least one of the area 71b and the execution icon display area 71c may be provided so as to straddle the first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72.

  The second image display device 72 is movable between a normal position facing the front of the lower end portion of the first image display device 71 and an effect position facing the front near the center of the first image display device 71. At the same time, it can be displaced from a horizontal posture to a vertical posture, and an operation effect is performed by moving or displacing during the execution of the variable display effect.

  On the right side of the effect space, a change display LED 73 whose display mode changes in conjunction with the change display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided, and in the upper part of the effect space, the change display effect is being executed. A movable effect device 74 that causes the movable member 75 to perform a predetermined effect operation, a light emission effect device 76 that causes the light emitting member 77 to perform a predetermined light effect, and the like are provided.

  On the back side of the game board 5, a magnetic sensor 80 a for detecting that magnetism exceeding a predetermined threshold has approached the game area 5 a and radio waves of a predetermined frequency are irradiated to the game board 5. A radio sensor 81a for detecting this, a main control device 100 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control device for controlling the effect of the game based on the effect command (command information) from the main control device 100 300 and a cover member 78 that opens and closes in the left-right direction around a rotation shaft provided on one side of the left and right and covers the upper part of the main control device 100 and the sub control device 300 from the rear.

  On the back side of the inner frame 4, a ball storage tank 84 a that stores game balls supplied from the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and a stored ball flow that flows down the game balls stored in the ball storage tank 84 a A payout device 85 having a payout motor 85a for paying out a game ball supplied from the path 84b, the storage ball flow passage 84b to the player, and game information (signal) relating to the game is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For controlling the payout device 85 based on an external output terminal plate 86 (corresponding to an external output unit) and a payout number command (command information) from the main control device 100, and on the basis of an operation of the launch handle 31 30 and a power supply for supplying operation power and backup power to the main control device 100, payout control device 200, sub-control device and controlled device. Location 400 and the like. The backup power is supplied only to the main control device 100, but may be supplied to the payout control device 200 and the sub control device.

  On the back side of the outer frame 2, that is, at a position where the player cannot operate, the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a hall computer provided in the office of the game hall, an island computer provided on the game island, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is provided with an input receiving device 87 (corresponding to an input receiving unit) for receiving an input from a calling lamp provided above and an external device such as a lending device provided with the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the input reception device 87, a first input reception switch 87a, a second input reception switch 87b, and a third input reception switch 87c for receiving a pressing operation are arranged side by side, and each of the input reception switches 87a to 87c. Thus, an input from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is accepted. Note that the input reception device 87 may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate, such as the outer side surface or the inner side surface of the outer frame 2, or the input reception device 87 may be provided on the upper surface of the frame light emitting unit 13 or the bottom surface of the lower plate 28. The player may be provided at a position where it is difficult for the player to operate.

<Control configuration of pachinko machines>
Next, a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 which is a control block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  The main control device 100 includes a main one-chip microcomputer incorporating a main CPU, a main ROM, and a main RAM, an input / output interface circuit (I / O), and the like. The main CPU is in accordance with a game control program stored in the main ROM. The main RAM is used as a work area, and the progress of the game is comprehensively controlled.

  The input interface includes a frame opening detection switch 7a, a normal winning opening switch 44a, a first starting opening switch 45a, a second starting opening switch 46a, a gate switch 51a, a large winning opening switch 54a, a magnetic sensor 80a, a radio wave sensor 81a, and a RAM. The clear switch 82a, the payout control device 200, and the like are connected, and input signals from various switches and commands from the payout control device 200 are input.

  The output interface includes a second start opening solenoid 47a, a special winning opening solenoid 55a, a game information display device 59, an error display device 83 that displays a code indicating the type of error that has occurred, an external output terminal board 86, and a payout control device 200. The sub-control device 300 and the like are connected, drive signals to various solenoids, display signals to various display devices (game information display device 59, error display device 83), and game information signals to the external output terminal board 86. In addition, commands to various control devices are output.

  The main RAM is supplied with backup power from the power supply device 400, so that the stored information can be retained even in the event of a power failure, and the game is based on the stored information when the power is restored. The control state is restored to the state before the power failure.

  The payout control apparatus 200 includes a payout CPU, a payout ROM, a payout one-chip microcomputer incorporating an payout RAM, an input / output interface circuit (I / O), and the like. The payout CPU follows a payout control program stored in the payout ROM. The payout RAM is used as a work area while controlling the payout and launch of the game ball.

  The input interface is connected to a payout device 85 (a payout ball detection switch, etc.), a firing handle 31 (touch sensor 33a, a firing stop switch 34, etc.), a main control device 100, etc., and a payout device 85 (a payout ball detection switch). Etc.) and the launch handle 31 (touch sensor 33a, launch stop switch 34, etc.) and the payout number command from the main controller 100 are input.

  The output interface is connected to a dispensing device 85 (such as a dispensing motor), a firing device 30 (such as a firing solenoid), a main control device 100, and the like, and a dispensing device 85 (such as a dispensing motor) and a firing device 30 (such as a firing solenoid). ) And a command to the main control device 100 are output.

  The payout RAM is not supplied with backup power from the power supply device 400. However, by supplying backup power, the storage information can be retained even in the event of a power failure, and the storage information retained when the power failure is restored. Based on the above, the payout control state may return to the state before the power failure.

  The sub control device 300 includes a sub CPU, a sub ROM, a sub RAM, an input / output interface circuit (I / O), a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM, a sound ROM, and the like, and the sub CPU is stored in the sub ROM. In accordance with the production control program, the execution of the production corresponding to the production command from the main control device 100 is controlled while using the sub RAM as a work area. Further, the VDP is configured to perform display control of image data stored in the CGROM based on a command from the sub CPU, and to perform output control of sound data stored in the sound ROM.

  The input interface is connected to the selection button switch 24a, the effect button switch 26a, the position detection switch provided in the movable effect device 74, the input reception switches 87a to 87c of the input reception device 87, the main control device 100, and the like. Input signals from various switches and effect commands from the main controller 100 are input.

  The output interface includes a frame light emitting unit 13, a rotary light emitting unit 14, a selection button LED 24b, an effect button LED, an effect button drive motor 26c, a first image display device 71, a second image display device 72, a movable effect device 74, and a light effect. A device 76 and the like are connected to output display signals to various LEDs and drive signals to various motors.

  Note that command communication between the main control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is bidirectional communication, but command communication between the main control device 100 and the sub control device 300 is performed from the main control device 100. Although unidirectional communication with the sub-control device 300 is performed, bidirectional communication may be used. Further, although the input receiving device 87 is connected to the sub control device 300, it may be connected to the main control device 100.

<Game progression mode>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4 which is a game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a game progress mode will be described.

  First, the initial gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is that the jackpot probability determined to be a big hit in the jackpot lottery is a normal probability (1/300), and the hit probability determined to be a win in the hit lottery is a low probability (1 / 30) is a normal gaming state (low probability non-temporary gaming state), and the production mode that defines the production mode of the variable display production executed by the first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72 is Any one of the production modes A to D is set.

  In the normal gaming state, a lottery lottery is performed based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 46, and as a result of a special symbol variation display (variation display effect) that informs the result of the lottery When the jackpot special symbol (bonus effect symbol) is displayed, the jackpot game (advantageous to the player) is performed a predetermined number of round games in which the variable winning device 53 (big prize opening 54) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner. Special game) is executed.

  In the jackpot game, the games of the games 1 to 4 per 2 round normal short, the game per 2 round probability variation short game, the game per 8 round probability variation length, the game per 10 round probability variation length, and the game per 15 round probability variation length game Eight types with different degrees of advantage are set, and during the big hit game, the normal game state is set.

  Two rounds of normal short win game 1 occurs in 20% of the case where it is determined that the first big hit lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 is a big win, and the variable winning device 53 (large winning port 54) A round game is performed twice, which is converted to an open state (short opening) for 0.5 seconds.

  The two rounds of normal short win game 2 occurs in 10% of the case where it is determined that the second big hit lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 46 is a big win, and the variable winning device 53 (large win port 54) A round game is performed twice, which is converted to an open state (short opening) for 0.5 seconds.

  Two rounds of normal short win game 3 occurs in 6% of the case where the second big hit lottery is determined to be a big win, and the variable winning device 53 (big winning opening 54) is converted to an open state for 0.5 seconds ( Round game with a short opening) is played twice.

  Two rounds of normal short win game 4 occurs in 4% of the case where it is determined that the second big hit lottery is a big win, and the variable winning device 53 (large winning port 54) is converted to an open state for 0.5 seconds ( Round game with a short opening) is played twice.

  The two rounds probable short win game occurs at 10% when the first big hit lottery is judged as a big win and at 10% when the second big win lottery is judged as the big win, and the variable winning device 53 (big win) Two round games are performed in which the mouth 54) is converted into an open state (short opening) for 0.5 seconds.

  It should be noted that the 2-round normal short win game 1 and the 2-round probable short win game have the same mode (similar mode) of the effects during the jackpot game, and it is difficult to distinguish which jackpot game is being executed. ing.

  The game per 8 rounds probable change length occurs in 20% of the case where it is determined that the 1st big hit lottery is a big win, and the variable winning device 53 (big winning opening 54) is converted to an open state for 28 seconds (long open). The round game is played 8 times.

  The game per 10 rounds probable change length occurs in 50% when it is determined to be a big win in the first jackpot lottery and 20% when it is determined as a big winner in the second jackpot lottery, and the variable winning device 53 (big prize) The round game in which the mouth 54) is converted into an open state (long open) for 28 seconds is performed ten times.

  The game per 15 rounds probable length change occurs in 50% of the case where the second big hit lottery is determined to be a big win, and the variable winning device 53 (large winning port 54) is converted into an open state for 28 seconds (long open). The round game is played 15 times.

  When the two rounds of normal short hit game 1 is completed, the game mode is changed to the normal game state, and the effect mode is set to effect mode D.

  When the two-round probability variable short win game ends, the first probability variable gaming state (high probability non-time short gaming state) in which the jackpot probability is high probability (1/60) and the hit probability is low probability (1/30). The production mode is set in accordance with the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuation display production) in which the production mode D or E is executed.

  Therefore, since the effect mode of 30 rotations after the end of the game 1 per 2 rounds normal short and the 30 rotations after the end of the 2 rounds probable short per game is the same, the player is in the normal gaming state It is difficult to determine whether the game is in the first probability variation game state, and when the production mode D is set, the player has a sense of expectation for the first probability variation game state.

  When the game per 8-round probability variable length, the game per 10-round probability variable length, and the game per 15-round probability variable length are finished, the jackpot probability is high probability (1/60), and the probability of winning is high probability (29/30) The transition is made to the second probability variation gaming state (high probability time short gaming state), and the rendering mode can be selected by the player from the rendering modes F to G.

  When two to four normal short win games 2 to 4 are completed, the short hit state is a low probability (1/300), and the win probability is a high probability (29/30). Transition over a predetermined period (30 rounds after 2 rounds of normal short game 2 ends, 50 rounds after 2 rounds of normal short game 3 ends, 2 rounds of normal short per 4 games after 100 rounds) The production mode is set according to the number of times that the production modes H to J are subjected to the special symbol variable display (variable display effect).

  In the first probability variation gaming state, the second probability variation gaming state, and the short-time gaming state, as in the normal gaming state, a big win lottery is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port, and the lottery When the jackpot special symbol (bonus effect symbol) is displayed as a result of the variable symbol display (variation display effect) for notifying the result of this, any type of jackpot game is executed. Note that the jackpot game, the probability variation game state, and the short-time game state may be collectively referred to as an advantageous state.

  In the short-time game state, a special symbol variable display of the short-time number (either 30 times, 50 times, or 100 times) set according to the type of jackpot game that caused the short-time game state is executed. Then, it shifts to the normal gaming state.

  In the normal gaming state and the first probability variation gaming state, it is easy to select a relatively long time (for example, 30 seconds) as the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol fluctuation display executed based on the winning lottery result. When the mode is displayed, the first per game where the second starting port 46 is opened for 0.2 seconds is executed at a rate of 80%, and after the second starting port 46 is opened for 0.2 seconds, 4.0 seconds is again played. The second per game to be released is executed at a rate of 20%.

  In the second probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state, a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds) is easily selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation display executed based on the winning lottery result. When the mode is displayed, the third per game where the second start port 46 is opened for 2.5 seconds and then opened again for 2.5 seconds is executed at a rate of 100%.

  Thus, when the second jackpot lottery is performed, the executed jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is finished, and the like are more advantageous to the player than when the first jackpot lottery is performed. Thus, the player has a sense of expectation that the second big hit lottery will be performed.

  In the normal game state and the first probability variation game state, a game is performed in which a game ball is launched to the left region of the game region 5a. In the second probability variation game state and the short-time game state, a game is performed in the right region of the game region 5a. A game to launch a ball is performed.

<Functional configuration of main controller>
Next, the functional configuration of the main control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 which is a functional block diagram of the main control device 100 according to the present embodiment.

  The main control device 100 includes game control means 110 that controls the progress of the game. The game control means 110 includes special figure determination information (random number) acquisition means 111, special figure determination information (hold) storage means 112, and Jackpot (special game) determination means 113, jackpot symbol determination means 114, special figure variation pattern determination means 115, special figure variation display execution means 116, jackpot game (special game) execution means 117, and prior determination means 118 A game state control means 119, a common figure determination information (random number) acquisition means 120, a common figure determination information (hold) storage means 121, a win (auxiliary game) determination means 122, a win symbol determination means 123, An ordinary map variation pattern determining means 124, an ordinary map variation display executing means 125, a winning game (auxiliary game) executing means 126, various table storage means 127, The error determining means 128, a prize balls paid out control unit 129, a command transmitting unit 130, a command receiving unit 131, the information updating unit 132, and a data output unit 133.

  The special figure determination information (random number) acquisition means 111 is based on the winning of a game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 46, and special figure determination information used for the jackpot lottery (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol determination random number) , Special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number) is acquired.

  The special figure determination information (holding) storage unit 112 stores the special figure determination information acquired by the special figure determination information (random number) acquisition unit 111 based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 in the first holding storage of the main RAM. A predetermined number (for example, four) is stored in the area as a first special figure hold (corresponding to the grant of the first right), and special figure determination information (random number) based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 46 The special figure determination information acquired by the acquisition means 111 is stored in the second reserved storage area of the main RAM as a second special figure reservation (limited to the grant of the second right) up to a predetermined number (for example, four), and the first A special figure hold number command indicating the number of special figure hold and the number of second special figure hold is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM to be sent to the sub-control device 300.

  The jackpot (special game) judging means 113 is the earliest (oldest) first special figure stored so that the second special figure hold is prioritized and digested over the first special figure hold. The main RAM to move the hold or the second special figure hold to the special figure execution storage area of the main RAM and to send a hold number command indicating the remaining number of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold to the sub-control device 300 Set in the send command area. Also, the jackpot determination random number, which is the special chart determination information moved to the special chart execution storage area, is checked against the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 12) to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot (whether the jackpot game is executed) or not. .

  The jackpot symbol determination means 114 stores the determination result by the jackpot (special game) determination means 113 and the jackpot symbol determination random number of the special symbol determination information moved to the special symbol execution storage area in the special symbol stop symbol determination table (see FIG. 12). The type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 62 is determined, and a special symbol stop symbol command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub-control device 300. Set in the transmission command area of the main RAM. Since the type of jackpot game is determined according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed, it can be said that the type of jackpot game is determined.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern determination means 115 is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13) which uses the determination result by the jackpot symbol determination means 114 and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number of the special figure determination information moved to the special figure execution storage area. The special figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for variably displaying the special symbol is determined, and a special figure fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM so as to be transmitted to the sub-control device 300. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the determination by the jackpot (special game) determination means 113, the determination by the jackpot symbol determination means 114, and the determination by the special figure variation pattern determination means 115 are lottery lottery, but the jackpot (special game) determination means 113 The determination based on the jackpot may be a lottery lottery, or the determination by the jackpot (special game) determination means 113 and the determination by the jackpot symbol determination means 114 may be a lottery lottery.

  The special symbol variation display executing means 116 performs special symbol variation display and stop display on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 62 based on the result of the jackpot lottery, and also displays the special symbol stop display. The special figure confirmation command shown is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM to be transmitted to the sub-control device 300.

  The jackpot game (special game) execution means 117 opens and closes a predetermined number of rounds based on the fact that the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 62. In the aspect, the jackpot game for converting the variable winning device 53 (big prize opening 54) from the closed state to the open state is executed, an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game, a round number command indicating the start of the round game and the number of rounds, An interval command indicating the start of an interval between round games and an ending command indicating the end of jackpot game are set in the transmission command area of the main RAM so as to be transmitted to the sub-control device 300.

  The pre-determining means 118 receives the special figure determination information (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol determination random number, special figure variation pattern determination random number) acquired by the special figure determination information (random number) acquisition means 111 as a big hit (special game) determination means 113, Determination is made in advance than the jackpot symbol determination means 114 and the special figure variation pattern determination means, and a prior determination command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM so as to be transmitted to the sub-control device 300.

  The gaming state control means 119 shifts to the gaming state of any one of the first probability variation gaming state, the second probability variation gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state according to the type of the jackpot gaming after the jackpot gaming is over, and is predetermined in the time-saving gaming state. When the special symbol variation display of the number of times (either 30 times, 50 times, or 100 times) is executed, the state is shifted to the normal gaming state, and a gaming state command corresponding to the shifted gaming state is transmitted to the sub-control device 300. As much as possible, it is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM.

  The common figure determination information (random number) acquisition means 120 is based on the passing of the game ball to the general figure gate 51, and the common figure determination information used for the winning lottery (the winning determination random number, the winning symbol determination random number, the normal figure variation pattern determination random number ) To get.

  The common figure determination information (hold) storage means 121 stores the common figure determination information acquired by the general figure determination information (random number) acquisition means 120 in the normal figure hold storage area of the main RAM up to a predetermined number (for example, four). A figure hold is stored (corresponding to the grant of the third right), and a universal figure hold number command indicating the number of common figure holds is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM for transmission to the sub-control device 300.

  The winning (auxiliary game) determination means 122 moves the earliest (oldest) common figure hold (normal figure determination information) stored earliest to the normal figure execution storage area of the main RAM, and stores it in the general figure execution storage area. The hit determination random number, which is the moved normal determination information, is checked against a hit determination table (not shown) to determine whether it is a win (whether or not a win game is executed).

  The winning symbol determination means 123 stores the determination result by the winning (auxiliary game) determining means 122 and the winning symbol determination random number which is the normal symbol determination information moved to the normal symbol execution storage area in the normal symbol stop symbol determination table (not shown). The type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 64 is determined by collation, and the normal symbol stop symbol command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM so as to be transmitted to the sub-control device 300. Note that since the type of winning game is determined according to the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed, it can be said that the type of winning game is determined.

  The normal pattern variation pattern determination means 124 uses the determination result of the winning symbol determination means 123 and the general pattern variation pattern determination random number which is the general pattern determination information moved to the general diagram execution storage area as a general pattern variation pattern determination table (not shown). The normal pattern variation pattern (variation time) in which the normal symbol is variably displayed is determined by comparing with the above, and the normal pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM to be transmitted to the sub-control device 300. To do.

  In this embodiment, the winning (auxiliary game) determination means 122, the determination by the winning symbol determination means 123, and the determination by the common figure variation pattern determination means 124 are the winning lottery. The determination according to may be a lottery, or the determination by the hit (auxiliary game) determination means 122 and the determination by the winning symbol determination means 123 may be a lottery.

  Based on the winning lottery result, the normal symbol change display execution means 125 performs a normal symbol change display and a stop display on the normal symbol display 64, and at the same time a sub-control device 300 issues a general symbol confirmation command indicating the normal symbol stop display. Is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM for transmission.

  The winning game (auxiliary game) execution means 126 performs a winning game for converting the second starting port 46 from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined opening / closing manner based on the normal symbol display 64 that the symbol is stopped and displayed. While executing, an opening command indicating the start of the winning game and an ending command indicating the end of the winning game are set in the transmission command area of the main RAM so as to be transmitted to the sub-control device 300.

  The various table storage means 127 stores various tables such as a jackpot determination table, a special figure stop symbol determination table, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, a hit determination table, a general figure stop symbol determination table, a general figure fluctuation pattern determination table.

  The error determination means 128 is configured to generate a predetermined error (frame opening) based on input signals from the frame opening detection switch 7a, the second start opening switch 46a, the gate switch 51a, the big prize opening switch 54a, the magnetic sensor 80a, and the radio wave sensor 81a. An error, an abnormal winning error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a right-handed error, etc.) and a transmission command of the main RAM to transmit an error occurrence command corresponding to the generated error to the sub-control device 300 Set to area. Further, it is determined whether or not the error has been resolved, and an error resolution command corresponding to the resolved error is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM so as to be transmitted to the sub-control device 300.

  The winning ball payout control means 129 determines whether or not to pay out the winning ball based on the input signals from the normal winning opening switch 44a, the first starting port switch 45a, the second starting port switch 46a, and the big winning port switch 54a. When a prize ball is paid out, a payout number command indicating the payout number is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM so as to be sent to the payout control device 200.

  The command transmission means 130 transmits the command set in the transmission command area of the main RAM to the payout control device 200 or the sub control device 300.

  The command receiving means 131 sets the command transmitted from the payout control device 200 in the received command area of the main RAM.

  The information updating means 132 includes a normal winning opening winning number indicating the number of gaming balls won in the normal winning opening 44, a normal second starting opening winning number indicating the number of gaming balls winning in the second starting opening 46 in the normal gaming state, The number of winning prizes indicating the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 54 in one round game, the number of passing gates indicating the number of game balls passing through the normal gate 51, and the number of hit games generated in the normal gaming state The number of hits per normal medium figure, the number of hits in the normal power support state (short-time game state), the number of hits per short-time medium figure, the probable game state, and the jackpot game that occurred continuously during the short-time game state The number of consecutive resorts (number of consecutive jackpots), the number of times of transition to probability variation, the number of transitions to time reduction, the number of times of transition to short hours, etc. are updated.

  The information output unit 133 outputs game information (error information, payout information, jackpot information, game state information, winning information) generated according to the progress of the game, game information updated by the information update unit 132, and the like to an external output terminal. Output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (external devices such as a hall computer, an island computer, a call lamp, and a lending device) via the output terminal of the board 86.

<Functional configuration of sub-control device>
Next, the functional configuration of the sub control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 which is a functional block diagram of the sub control device 300 according to the present embodiment.

  The sub-control device 300 includes an effect control means 310 that controls the progress of the effect. The effect control means 310 includes a command receiving means 311, a customer waiting control means 312, an effect mode control means 313, and a variable display effect control means 314 ( Icon display means 315, prefetch effect determining means 316, prefetch effect executing means 317, effect symbol determining means 318, variable display effect pattern determining means 319, notice effect determining means 320, operation effect determining means 321, variable display effect executing means 322 ( Effect symbol fluctuation display means 323, fourth symbol fluctuation display means 324, background display means 325, notice effect execution means 326, operation effect execution means 327)), jackpot effect control means 328 (hit effect determination means 329, jackpot effect execution means) 330), special effect control means 331 (prefetch special effect execution means 3) 2, the variation in the special effect execution means 333, and a error special effect execution means 334).

  The command receiving means 311 sets the command transmitted from the main control device 100 in the received command area of the sub RAM.

  The customer waiting control unit 312 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in a customer waiting state in which the variable display effect and the jackpot effect are not performed, and promotes the game when the predetermined time has elapsed. Various waiting devices for various effects (speaker 12, frame light-emitting unit 13, rotating light-emitting unit 14, frame display 15, selection button device 23, effect button device 25, first image display device, second image display device, (Variable display LED, movable effect device 74, light emission effect device 76, etc.).

  The effect mode control means 313 changes the set effect mode to another effect mode when the game state changes or when the effect mode change lottery is won.

  The fluctuation display effect control means 314 notifies the result of the big win lottery based on the special figure stop symbol command and the special figure fluctuation pattern command set in the reception command area of the sub-RAM (produce a special symbol fluctuation display). Control for executing the variable display effect for the various effect devices.

  The icon display means 315 displays the hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold on the first image display device 71 based on the special figure hold number command set in the reception command area of the sub-RAM. While displaying on the 1st icon display area 71a and the 2nd icon display area 72a, the execution icon corresponding to the fluctuation display effect currently being performed is displayed on the execution icon display area 71c of the 1st image display apparatus 71. FIG.

  The pre-reading effect determining means 316 has a possibility that a jackpot game may be executed over one or a plurality of variable display effects based on a prior determination command set in the reception command area of the sub-RAM, or a predetermined reach. A pre-reading effect that predicts that the effect will be executed (a pre-reading continuous notice effect that executes a predetermined effect for each variable display effect, a pre-reading icon change effect that changes the hold icon or execution icon of the normal display mode to a special display mode, Whether or not to execute a pre-reading zone effect that changes the normal background image displayed on the one-image display device 71 and / or the second image display device 72 into a special background image, and the type of pre-reading effect to be executed are determined.

  The pre-reading effect execution means 317 displays various types of pre-reading effects determined by the pre-reading effect determination means 316 (speaker 12, frame light emitting unit 13, rotating light emitting unit 14, frame indicator 15, selection button device 23, effect button device). 25, the first image display device, the second image display device, the fluctuation display LED, the movable effect device 74, the light emission effect device 76, etc.).

  The effect symbol determination means 318 is a special symbol type specified by the special symbol stop symbol command set in the reception command area of the sub-RAM and / or a special symbol variation pattern and an effect symbol specified by the special symbol variation pattern command. The determination random number is collated with the effect symbol determination table to determine the type of effect symbols (left symbol Z1, middle symbol Z2, right symbol Z3) to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display effect.

  The variation display effect pattern determination means 319 includes the special symbol type specified by the special symbol stop symbol command set in the reception command area of the sub RAM, the special symbol variation pattern identified by the special symbol variation pattern command, and the variation display. The effect display determination random number is collated with a change display effect pattern determination table (not shown) to determine the change display effect pattern of the change display effect.

  The notice effect determination unit 320 compares the change display effect pattern determined by the change display effect pattern determination means 319 and the notice effect determination random number with a notice effect determination table (not shown), and the jackpot game is played as part of the change display effect. The presence / absence of execution of the advance notice for notifying that there is a possibility of being executed, that the predetermined reach effect is executed, or that the jackpot game is executed is determined.

  The operation effect determining means 321 compares the variable display effect pattern determined by the variable display effect pattern determining means 319 and the operation effect determination random number with an operation effect determination table (not shown), and selects the selection button 24 as part of the variable display effect. The presence or absence of execution of an operation effect for notifying that a jackpot game may be executed based on the operation of the effect button 26, a predetermined reach effect, or a jackpot game being executed Determine the type of production.

  The variable display effect execution means 322 is used for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery based on the determination result of the effect symbol determination means 318, the determination result of the variable display effect pattern determination means 319, etc. (to produce a variable symbol variable display effect). The variable display effect is executed by various effect devices.

  The effect symbol variation display means 323 is displayed on the effective line while the effect image is scrolled in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction by the first image display device 71 or the second image display device 72 or rotated on the spot. The variation display of the effect symbol is executed by changing the type of the effect symbol.

  The fourth symbol variation display means 324 changes the light emission mode of the variation display LED 73 over the execution period of the special symbol variation display, and stops the change of the light emission mode of the variation display LED 73 when the special symbol variation display ends. By doing so, the so-called fourth symbol variation display is executed.

  Based on the determination result of the prefetch effect determining unit 316 and the determination result of the variable display effect pattern determining unit 319, the background display unit 325 displays the background image serving as the background of the variable display effect on the first image display device 71 and the second image display. It is displayed on the device 72.

  Based on the determination result of the notice effect determining means 320, the notice effect executing means 326 may execute a jackpot game as a part of the variable display effect, execute a predetermined reach effect, A notice effect for notifying that it will be executed is executed by various effect devices.

  The operation effect executing means 327 may execute a jackpot game based on the operation of the selection button 24 or the effect button 26 during the effective period as part of the variable display effect based on the determination result of the operation effect determining means 321. And various effect devices perform an operation effect for notifying that a predetermined reach effect is executed or that a jackpot game is executed.

  The jackpot effect control means 328 performs control for executing the jackpot effect on various effect devices based on the opening command, the round number command, the interval command, and the ending command set in the reception command area of the sub RAM.

  The jackpot effect determining means 329 collates the opening command set in the reception command area of the sub-RAM with a jackpot effect determination table (not shown), and determines the type of jackpot effect for effecting the jackpot game.

  The jackpot effect execution means 330 causes various effect devices to execute the jackpot effect determined by the jackpot effect determination means 329 based on the round number command, interval command, and ending command set in the reception command area of the sub RAM.

  The special effect control means 331 performs various special effects on the basis of inputs from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 received by the input receiving device 87 (external devices such as a hall computer, island computer, call lamp, and lending device). Control for execution by the effect device (frame display 15, speaker 12, etc.) is performed.

  The pre-reading special effect execution means 332 starts the variable symbol display of the special symbol that generates the jackpot game based on receiving the first input from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (pressing operation of the first input receiving switch 87a). Various effect devices are caused to execute a prefetch special effect that suggests (notices) that a jackpot game may be executed before (preliminary). Note that the pre-reading special effect may be replaced with the pre-special effect.

  The changing special effect executing means 333 displays the change display of the special symbol that generates the jackpot game based on the reception of the second input (pressing operation of the second input receiving switch 87b) from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various effect devices are caused to execute special effects during change that suggest (predict) that a jackpot game may be executed during the execution.

  The error special effect execution means 334 receives a third input from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (pressing operation of the third input acceptance switch 87c), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs a predetermined operation over a predetermined period. Various effect devices are made to execute an error special effect informing that an error has occurred.

<Control processing of main control device>
Next, control processing of the main control apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The control process of the main controller 100 includes a main process and a timer interrupt process.

<Main processing of main control device>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control device 100. When operating power is supplied from the power supply device 400, a system reset occurs, a security check of the main one-chip microcomputer is performed, and then the following processing is performed. Is done.

  First, in step P1, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, the game control program is read from the main ROM, and it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 82a is operated. If it is operated, the stored information in the main RAM is initialized. On the other hand, if the checksum is not operated, the checksum is calculated and compared with the checksum stored in the main RAM. If the checksum is different, the storage information in the main RAM is initialized. On the other hand, when the checksums are the same, processing for returning the game control state to the state before the power failure is performed based on the stored information in the main RAM.

  Next, in step P2, random number update processing is performed. In this random number update process, in order to determine the initial value of the special round pattern determination random number, the common pattern fluctuation pattern determination random number, the big hit determination initial random number for determining the big hit determination random number, the initial value of the big hit symbol determination random number The process of updating the jackpot symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number for determining the round initial value of the hit determination random number, the hit symbol determination initial value random number for determining the round initial value of the hit symbol determining random number, etc. I do.

  Next, in step P3, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred in which the supply of operating power from the power supply device 400 is stopped. If a power failure has not occurred (P3: NO), the process again proceeds to the random number update process of step P2. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (P3: YES), in step 4, an interrupt prohibition that prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing is set.

  Next, in step P5, the output port is cleared. In step P6, a checksum is calculated and saved in the main RAM. In step P7, a backup flag to be referred to upon recovery from a power failure is turned on. In step P8, Processing for prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the process waits until the supply of operating power is completely stopped.

<Timer interrupt processing of main controller>
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the main control apparatus 100. When a clock pulse is input from the CTC circuit every predetermined period (4 ms), the following process is performed.

  First, in step P50, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, special symbol change time, special symbol stop time, jackpot game opening time, jackpot game interval time, jackpot game ending time, normal symbol change time, normal symbol stop time, per symbol game The timer for measuring the opening time of the game, the ending time of the hit game, etc. is updated.

  Next, in step P100, random number update processing is performed. In this random number update process, jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol determination random number, hit determination random number, hit symbol determination random number, jackpot determination initial value random number, jackpot symbol determination initial value random number, hit determination initial value random number, hit symbol determination initial value random number, etc. Update.

  In addition, the update of the random number is updated one by one so as to circulate between the minimum value and the maximum value of the random number, but the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol determination random number, the hit determination random number and the hit symbol determination random number, When the updated random number value reaches the initial value of the circulation, the initial value of the new circulation is set with reference to the initial value random number described above, and the update is continued.

  Next, in step P150, input processing is performed. In this input process, input of detection signals (input signals) from various switches and various sensors is monitored, and reception of commands from the payout control device 200 is monitored. Details will be described later.

  Next, in step P200, error detection processing is performed. In this error detection process, the occurrence and end of a frame opening error in which the inner frame 4 and / or the glass frame 7 are opened is detected based on an input signal from the frame opening detection switch 7a. Further, based on the input signal from the second start port switch 46a or the big prize port switch 54a, a predetermined number (one or a plurality of numbers) in the non-winning period in which the second start port 46 or the big prize port 54 is closed. Occurrence of an abnormal prize-winning error in which a game ball is won. Further, occurrence of a magnetic error in which magnetism exceeding a predetermined threshold is detected is detected based on an input signal from the magnetic sensor 80a. Further, occurrence of a radio wave error in which a radio wave having a predetermined frequency is detected is detected based on an input signal from the radio wave sensor 81a. Further, based on the input signal from the gate switch 51a, the occurrence of a right-handed error in which the game ball passes through the normal gate 51 in the normal gaming state is detected.

  Next, in step P250, special figure game processing is performed. In this special figure game process, control of the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 62, the execution of a jackpot game (special game) for opening and closing the variable winning device 53, and the like are controlled. Processing is performed. Details will be described later.

  Next, in step P300, the usual game process is performed. In this ordinary game process, a process for controlling the display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 64 and the execution of the winning game (auxiliary game) for opening and closing the second starting port 46 is performed. Details will be described later.

  Next, in step P350, display information output setting processing is performed. In this display information output setting process, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol hold display 61, the second special symbol display 62, the second special symbol hold display 63, the normal symbol display 64, the normal symbol. Display information (display data) to be displayed on the hold display unit 65, the round number display unit 66, the right-handed display unit 67, the short-time gaming state display unit 68, and the high-probability gaming state display unit 69 is generated, and the display information output of the main RAM is output. Processing to set the area is performed.

  Next, in step P400, a prize ball control process is performed. In this prize ball control process, whether or not to pay out the prize ball is determined based on input signals from the normal prize opening switch 44a, the first start opening switch 45a, the second start opening switch 46a, and the big prize opening switch 54a. When a prize ball is paid out, processing such as setting a payout number command indicating the payout number in the transmission command area of the main RAM to be sent to the payout control device 200 is performed.

  Next, in step P450, numerical information update processing is performed. In this numerical information update processing, numerical information (special game information) to be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (external devices such as hall computers, island computers, call lamps, rental devices, etc.) via the external output terminal board 86. Process to update. Details will be described later.

  Next, in step P500, game information output setting processing is performed. In this game information output setting process, game information (normal game information, special game information) to be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (external devices such as a hall computer, island computer, call lamp, and lending device) via the external output terminal board 86. (Processing information) is set in the external output area of the main RAM. Details will be described later.

  Finally, in step P550, an output process is performed and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In this output process, various commands set in the transmission command area of the main RAM are transmitted to the payout control device 200 and the sub-control device 300, or display information (display data set in the display information output area of the main RAM) is displayed. ) Is output to the game information display device 59 and the error display device 83, and the game information set in the external output area of the main RAM is output from the external output terminal board 86.

<Input processing of main control device>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the input process of the main control apparatus 100, and is executed in the timer interrupt process described above.

  First, in Step P151, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball winning in the normal winning opening 44. If there is no game ball winning in the normal winning opening 44 (P151: NO), the process proceeds to Step P153. On the other hand, if a game ball has been won in the normal winning opening 44 (P151: YES), 10 winning balls in the main RAM referred to when a payout number command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in step P152. Add 1 to the counter.

  Next, in step P153, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball winning in the big winning opening 54. If there is no game ball winning in the big winning opening 54 (P153: NO), the process proceeds to step P155. On the other hand, if a game ball is won at the big winning opening 54 (P153: YES), 15 prize balls in the main RAM referred to when a payout number command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in step P154. Add 1 to the counter.

  Next, in Step P155, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball winning in the first start opening 45. If there is no game ball winning in the first start opening 45 (P155: NO), the process proceeds to Step P161. On the other hand, if there is a winning game ball at the first start opening 45 (P155: YES), the main RAM three awards to be referred to when a payout number command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in step P156. Add 1 to the sphere counter.

  Next, in Step P157, it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation number is smaller than the upper limit value (4). If the number of first special figure hold is not smaller than the upper limit (4) (P157: NO), the process proceeds to step P161. On the other hand, if the first special figure hold number is smaller than the upper limit value (P157: YES), special figure determination information (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol determination random number, special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number) is acquired in step P158. In step P159, the first special figure reservation number is incremented by 1, and the special figure reservation number command is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM.

  Next, in step P160, a first preliminary determination process is performed. In this first pre-determination process, the special figure determination information (big-hit determination random number, big-hit symbol determination random number, special figure variation pattern determination random number) acquired in step P158 is ahead of determination in the special figure game process (P250) described later. The prior determination command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM.

  Next, in Step P161, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball winning at the second start port 46. If there is no winning of a game ball at the second starting port 46 (P161: NO), the process proceeds to Step P167. If there is a winning game ball at the second starting port 46 (P161: YES), one winning ball counter in the main RAM referred to when a payout number command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in step P162. 1 is added.

  Next, in Step P163, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number is smaller than the upper limit value (4). When the number of second special figure reservation is not smaller than the upper limit value (4) (P163: NO), the process proceeds to Step P167. On the other hand, if the second special figure holding number is smaller than the upper limit value (P163: YES), special figure determination information (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol determination random number, special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number) is acquired in step P164. In step P165, the second special figure reservation number is incremented by 1, and the special figure reservation number command is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM.

  Next, in step P166, a second preliminary determination process is performed. In this second pre-determination process, the special figure determination information (big-hit determination random number, big-hit symbol determination random number, special figure variation pattern determination random number) acquired in step P164 is ahead of determination in the special figure game process (P250) described later. The prior determination command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM.

  Next, in step P167, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball passing to the usual gate 51. If there is no game ball passing through the normal gate (P167: NO), the current input process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a game ball passing through the ordinary gate (P167: YES), it is determined in step P168 whether or not the number of reserved symbols is smaller than the upper limit (4).

  When the number of reserved maps is not smaller than the upper limit (4) (P168: NO), the current input process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of common symbols held is smaller than the upper limit value (4) (P168: YES), in step P169, the common symbol determination information (winning determination random number, winning symbol determination random number, common symbol variation pattern determination random number) is obtained. Acquired and stored in the main figure hold storage area of the main RAM. In step P170, the number of the general figure hold is incremented by 1, and the general figure hold number command is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM, and the current winning process is terminated. To do.

  In the first prior determination process (P160) and the second prior determination process (P166), the special figure determination information acquired in step P158 or step P164 is determined. The special figure determination information stored in the reserved storage area may be determined. Further, the special figure determination information may be determined using a table for prior determination, or the special figure determination information may be determined using a table used in the special figure game process.

<Special game processing of main controller>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special game process of the main controller 100, and is executed in the timer interrupt process described above.

  First, in step P251, the special figure game process data stored in the main RAM is referred to, and in step P252, the branch destination process is specified from the special figure game process data.

  If the special figure game process data = 0, the special figure hold memory determination process is performed in step P253, and the current special figure game process is terminated. In this special figure hold memory determination process, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure hold. If there is a special figure hold, a first jackpot lottery is performed based on the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold. The special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 62 starts the special symbol variation display, sets the variation time, and displays a special symbol variation start command (special symbol stop symbol command, The special figure variation pattern command) is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM, and the special figure game process data is set to 1. On the other hand, when there is no special figure hold, processing for setting the customer waiting state command in the transmission command area of the main RAM is performed. Details will be described later.

  When the special figure game process data = 1, in step P254, a special symbol variation process is performed, and the current special figure game process is terminated. In this special symbol variation process, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. When the variation time has elapsed, the special symbol stop symbol determined in the special symbol hold storage determination processing (P253) is displayed as the first special symbol display. Is displayed on the display unit 60 or the second special symbol display 62, the stop time is set, and a special figure confirmation command indicating the stop of the special symbol variation display is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM. 2 is set.

  If the special figure game process data = 2, in step P255, a special symbol stop process is performed, and the current special figure game process is terminated. In this special symbol stop process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed. In addition, when the special figure stop symbol is a special jackpot special symbol, the opening time of the big hit game is set and an opening command indicating the start of the big hit game opening is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM. Processing to set data to 3 is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure stop symbol is a lost special symbol, the special figure game process data is set to 0.

  When the special figure game process data = 3, the jackpot game process is performed in step P256, and the current special figure game process is terminated. In this jackpot game processing, it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed, and when the opening time has elapsed, the big prize opening 54 is opened, the round winning game opening time is set and the round game is started. A process of setting the round number command indicating the start and the round number in the transmission command area of the main RAM is performed.

  In addition, it is determined whether or not the end condition of whether the big winning opening opening time elapses in a round game or a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins is satisfied, and when the end condition is satisfied, the final round game is ended. If it is not the end of the final round game, the big prize opening 54 is closed, the interval time is set and the interval is started. Processing to set in the transmission command area of the RAM is performed.

  In addition, it is determined whether or not the interval time has elapsed during the interval, and when the interval time elapses, the grand prize opening 54 is opened again, the round winning game opening time is set and the round game is started. A process of setting the round number command indicating the start and the round number in the transmission command area of the main RAM is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is the end of the final round game, the ending time is set and the ending is started, and an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed during the ending, and when the ending time has elapsed, the special figure game process data is set to 4.

  When the special figure game process data = 4, the big hit game end process is performed in step P257, and the current special figure game process is ended. In this jackpot game end process, the game state command indicating the game state is set by setting the game state (probability change game state 1, probability change game state 2, time-short game state) corresponding to the special figure stop symbol that generated the jackpot game. Set in the transmission command area of the RAM, and set the number of short hours (0 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, up to the next time), which is the number of times of variable display in which the short time gaming state continues, and set the special figure game processing data to 0 Perform processing to set to.

<Special Figure Hold Memory Determination Process of Main Controller>
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the special figure hold memory determination process of the main control device 100, and is executed in the special figure game process described above.

  First, in Step P253-1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (P253-1: YES), the current special symbol hold memory determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation display is not in progress (P253-1: NO), in step P253-2, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number is 1 or more.

  If the number of second special figure hold is 1 or more (P253-2: YES), in step P253-3, 1 is subtracted from the second special figure hold number, and the special figure hold number command is a main RAM transmission command. The area is set, and the process proceeds to Step P253-6.

  On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation number is not 1 or more (P253-2: NO), it is determined in step P253-4 whether the first special figure reservation number is 1 or more. When the number of first special figure hold is 1 or more (P253-4: YES), in step P253-5, 1 is subtracted from the first special figure hold number, and the special figure hold number command is a transmission command of the main RAM. Set to area.

  Next, in step P253-6, the contents of the reserved storage area obtained by subtracting the special figure reservation number are shifted. Specifically, the first (oldest) special figure determination information stored earliest among the special figure determination information stored in the first reserved storage area when the first special figure reservation number is subtracted. When moving to the special figure execution storage area of the main RAM and subtracting the second special figure holding number, the earliest (the oldest) stored in the special figure determination information stored in the second reserved storage area ) Is transferred to the special figure execution storage area of the main RAM.

  Next, in step P253-7, a jackpot determination process is performed. In this jackpot determination process, the jackpot determination random number which is the special chart determination information moved to the special chart execution storage area is checked against the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 12) to determine whether or not the jackpot is determined (whether the jackpot game is executed). Determine whether. Details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

  Next, in step P253-8, special figure stop symbol determination processing is performed. In the special figure stop symbol determination process, the determination result of the jackpot determination process (P253-7) and the jackpot symbol determination random number which is the special symbol determination information moved to the special symbol execution storage area are used as the special symbol stop symbol determination table (see FIG. 12). ) To determine the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 62. Details of the special figure stop symbol determination table will be described later.

  Next, in step P253-9, a special figure stop symbol command corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol stop symbol determination process (P253-8) is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM.

  Next, in step P253-10, special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is performed. In this special figure fluctuation pattern determination means, the special figure stop pattern determination process (P253-8) and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number which is the special figure determination information moved to the special figure execution storage area are determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern determination. A special figure variation pattern (variation time) for variably displaying the special symbol is determined by collating with the table (see FIG. 13). Details of the special figure variation pattern determination table will be described later.

  Next, in step P253-11, the special figure fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determination result of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (P253-10) is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM.

  Next, in step P253-12, special figure fluctuation start data indicating the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the determination result of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (P253-10) and the special symbol fluctuation start is set in the main RAM.

  Next, in step P253-13, the customer waiting flag set in the main RAM is cleared when the customer waiting state in which neither the special symbol change display nor the big hit game is executed is executed. In step P253-14, the special waiting flag is cleared. 1 is set in the figure game process data, and the current special figure hold memory determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step P253-14 that the number of first special figure hold is not 1 or more (P253-4: NO), whether or not the customer waiting state flag is set in the main RAM in step P253-15. Determine. If there is a customer waiting state flag (P253-15: YES), the current special figure hold memory determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no customer waiting state flag (P253-15: NO), the customer waiting state flag is set in the main RAM in step P253-16, and in step P253-17, the customer waiting state flag is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM. A customer wait state command indicating that the device is in a wait state is set, and the current special figure hold memory determination process is terminated.

<Big hit judgment table>
FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot determination table, and is referred to in the jackpot determination process described above.

  In the jackpot determination table, a jackpot probability (low probability, high probability), a jackpot determination random number value, and a determination result (losing, jackpot) are associated with each other. As can be seen from FIG. 12A, when the jackpot probability is low, the jackpot is determined with a probability of 1/300, and when the jackpot probability is high, the probability is 1/60 (low probability gaming state). (5 times the probability).

<Special figure stop symbol determination table>
FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of the special figure stop symbol determination table, which is referred to in the special symbol stop symbol determination process described above.

  In this special figure stop symbol determination table, the types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) that are variably displayed, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the distribution ratio for the loss and jackpot, and the stop to be distributed The types of symbols are associated with each other, and for reference, the types of jackpot games to be generated and the number of electric support given after the jackpot game are shown.

  Here, “electric support” is an abbreviation for the ordinary power support state, and the ordinary power support state has a higher probability of being determined to be a hit in the lottery than the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol This is a state in which a short fluctuation time is easily determined as the fluctuation time. Therefore, the number of times the second start port 46 is released per unit time is increased compared to the normal gaming state by entering the normal power support state, making it easier for the game ball to win, and the player can play the game more advantageously than the normal gaming state. It is possible to proceed.

  “1 per 2 round shorts” is a jackpot game in which a round game in which the variable winning device 53 (large winning port 54) is converted to an open state (short opening) for 0.5 seconds is performed twice. After the jackpot game is over, the game goes to a normal game state in which the jackpot probability is low and the electric power support state is not established.

  “2 rounds of normal short win 2” is a jackpot game in which a round game in which the variable winning device 53 (large winning opening 54) is converted into an open state (short open) for 0.5 seconds is performed twice. After the jackpot game is over, the jackpot probability is low, and the state shifts to the short-time game state in which the normal power support state is maintained until the special symbol variation display is executed 30 times.

  “3 per normal round 2 short wins” is a big win game in which a round game in which the variable winning device 53 (big winning opening 54) is converted into an open state (short open) for 0.5 seconds is performed twice. After the jackpot game is over, the jackpot probability is low, and the state shifts to the short-time game state in which the normal power support state is maintained until the special symbol variation display is executed 50 times.

  “2 round normal short win 4” is a big win game in which a round game in which the variable winning device 53 (big winning opening 54) is converted into an open state (short open) for 0.5 seconds is performed twice. After the jackpot game is over, the jackpot probability is low, and the state shifts to the short-time game state in which the normal power support state is maintained until the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times.

  “Two rounds probability change short win” is a jackpot game in which a round game in which the variable winning device 53 (big prize opening 54) is converted to an open state for 0.5 seconds is performed twice, and after the jackpot game ends. The jackpot probability is a high probability and a transition is made to the first probability variation gaming state (high probability non-time-short gaming state) that does not enter the normal power support state.

  “Eight rounds probable length change” is a jackpot game in which the round winning game 53 (big prize opening 54) is converted into an open state (long open) for 28 seconds, and is performed eight times. After the end, the game is shifted to the second probability variation gaming state (high probability short-time gaming state) in which the jackpot probability is high and the power jacking support state is maintained until the next jackpot game.

  “10 rounds probable big hit” is a big win game in which a round game in which the variable winning device 53 (big prize opening 54) is converted into an open state (long open) for 28 seconds is 10 times, and the end of the big win game Later, the game goes to the second probability variable gaming state (high probability short-time gaming state) in which the jackpot probability is high and the electric power is supported until the next jackpot game.

  “15 rounds probable big hit” is a big win game in which a round game in which the variable winning device 53 (big prize opening 54) is converted into an open state (long open) for 28 seconds is 8 times, and the end of the big win game Later, the game goes to the second probability variable gaming state (high probability short-time gaming state) in which the jackpot probability is high and the electric power is supported until the next jackpot game.

  As can be seen from FIG. 12 (b), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the jackpot game is executed, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the jackpot game is executed. This makes it easier to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. That is, it can be said that the game value given to the player is likely to increase.

<Special Figure Variation Pattern Judgment Table>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, which is referred to in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process described above.

  In the special figure variation pattern determination table, the types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) to be variably displayed, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the number of special figure reservations (first special figure reservation number, 2nd special figure hold number), a distribution ratio with respect to the special figure hold number, a special figure fluctuation pattern to be distributed, and a special figure fluctuation time with respect to the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated with each other. The fluctuation display effect pattern in is shown.

  Here, “normal fluctuation 1”, “normal fluctuation 2”, “shortening fluctuation”, and “super-shortening fluctuation” means that the production symbol (left symbol Z1, middle symbol Z2, right symbol Z3) fluctuates at high speed, and at least When one effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and a plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped, the combination of the temporarily stopped effect symbols is a part of the jackpot effect symbol in which the jackpot effect symbol is notified. This is a variable display effect pattern in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, “normal reach” indicates a reach that forms a reach state and has the lowest expectation level in which a jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed (a jackpot game is executed).

  In addition, “Long reach” means a reach that has a longer fluctuation time than normal reach, forms a reach state, and that the jackpot effect design is stopped and displayed (the jackpot game is executed) has a higher expectation than normal reach. ing.

  In addition, “Super Reach (S Reach)” means that the fluctuation time is longer than that of the long reach, the reach state is formed, and the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed (the jackpot game is executed). Higher reach.

  In addition, “special reach (SP reach)” means that the fluctuation time is longer than that of super reach, a reach state is formed, and the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed (a jackpot game is executed). Higher reach.

  The “full-reach reach” is a reach that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot effect symbol is variably displayed at a low speed, and is a reach that is executed only when a jackpot game is executed.

<Main game processing of main control device>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a general game process of the main control device 100, which is executed in the timer interrupt process described above.

  First, in step P301, the ordinary game processing data stored in the main RAM is referred to, and in step P302, the branch destination process is specified from the ordinary game processing data.

  If the ordinary game processing data = 0, the ordinary diagram hold memory determination process is performed in step 303, and the current ordinary game process is terminated. In this general figure hold memory determination process, it is determined whether or not there is a general figure hold. If there is a general figure hold, a winning lottery is performed based on the general figure hold and the normal symbol display 64 changes the normal symbol. Start the display, set the change time, and set the normal figure change start command (the normal figure stop pattern command, the normal figure change pattern command) indicating the start of the change display of the normal symbol in the transmission command area of the main RAM. A process of setting 1 to the figure game process data is performed.

  If the ordinary game processing data = 1, the normal symbol variation process is performed in step P304, and the current ordinary game processing is terminated. In this normal symbol variation process, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, and when the variation time has elapsed, the normal symbol display unit 64 displays the normal symbol stop symbol determined in the general symbol hold memory determination processing (P303). A stop time is set, and a stop time is set, a general figure confirmation command indicating stop of normal symbol fluctuation display is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM, and a process of setting 2 in the general game processing data is performed.

  If the ordinary game processing data = 2, a normal symbol stop process is performed in step P305, and the current ordinary game process is terminated. In this normal symbol stop process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol stop time has passed. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a normal symbol, the winning game opening time is set and the winning game opening time is set. An opening command indicating the start is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM, and processing for setting 3 in the ordinary game processing data is performed. On the other hand, when the usual figure stop symbol is a lost normal symbol, processing for setting the common figure game process data to 0 is performed.

  If the ordinary game processing data = 3, the winning game processing is performed in step P306, and the current ordinary game processing is terminated. In this winning game process, it is determined whether or not the opening time has passed. When the opening time has passed, the second start port 46 is opened for the number of times and time corresponding to the normal symbol, and the normal game processing data is obtained. The process set to 4 is performed.

  When the ordinary game processing data = 4, in step P307, a winning game end process is performed, and the current ordinary game process is terminated. In this winning game ending process, the end condition is satisfied whether the opening of the second start port 46 for the number of times and time corresponding to the winning normal symbol is finished or a prescribed number (for example, 10) of the game balls wins. If the end condition is satisfied, the ending time is set, the ending is started, and the ending command indicating the ending start is set in the transmission command area of the main RAM.

  In addition, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed during the ending, and when the ending time has elapsed, processing for setting the usual game processing data to 0 is performed.

<Game information update process of main control device>
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the game information update process of the main control apparatus 100, and is executed in the timer interrupt process described above.

  First, in step P451, a normal winning opening winning number updating process is performed. In this normal winning opening winning number update process, a normal winning is performed by adding (updating) 1 to the normal winning opening winning counter stored in the main RAM every time a game ball wins the normal winning opening 44. The number of game balls won in the mouth 44 is updated.

  It should be noted that a normal winning slot winning number counter is provided for each gaming state (normal gaming state, first probability variation gaming state, second probability variation gaming state, short-time gaming state), and the gaming state when a game ball is won in the regular winning slot 44 A process may be performed in which 1 is added to the normal winning slot winning number counter corresponding to.

  Next, in step P452, start opening prize number update processing is performed. In this starting port winning number updating process, a process is performed in which 1 is added to the starting port winning number counter stored in the main RAM for every winning of the game ball to the second starting port 46 in the normal gaming state. 2 Update the number of game balls won in the starting port 46.

  In addition, a starting port winning number counter is provided for each gaming state (normal gaming state, first probability variation gaming state, second probability variation gaming state, and short-time gaming state), and the gaming state when a game ball is won at the second starting port 46 A process of adding 1 to the start opening winning number counter corresponding to.

  In addition, a start opening winning number counter for the first starting opening 45 is provided, and a process of adding 1 to the starting opening winning number counter for the first starting opening 45 is performed every time a game ball wins the first starting opening 45. Thus, the number of game balls won in the first start port 45 may be updated, or a start port winning number counter for the first start port 45 is provided for each gaming state, and the first start port 45 has a game. You may make it perform the process which adds 1 to the starting opening winning number counter for the 1st starting opening 45 corresponding to the game state when a ball wins.

  Next, in step P453, a big winning opening winning number updating process is performed. In this big prize opening prize number update process, 1 is added to the big prize mouth prize number counter stored in the main RAM every time a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 54 during the round game, and the next round game is performed. The number of game balls won in the big prize opening 54 during one round game is updated by performing a process of resetting the big prize opening prize number counter to 0 when it is started and when ending is started.

  In addition to the grand prize winning counter, a grand prize winning total counter is provided. When a game ball wins the big winning prize 54 during the big hit game, 1 is added to the grand prize winning total counter. At the same time, when the jackpot game is over, the number of game balls won in the jackpot 54 may be updated during the jackpot game by performing a process of resetting the jackpot total prize counter to 0. Alternatively, it is possible to update only the big prize opening total winning number counter without providing the big winning prize number counter.

  Next, in step P454, a gate passage number update process is performed. In this gate passage number update process, the gate passage number counter is incremented by 1 (updated) every time a game ball passes to the ordinary gate 51 to pass through the ordinary gate 51. Update the number of game balls.

  In addition, a gate passage number counter is provided for each gaming state (normal gaming state, first probability variation gaming state, second probability variation gaming state, short-time gaming state), and corresponds to the gaming state when the game ball passes through the general gate 51. A process of adding 1 to the gate passage number counter to be performed may be performed.

  Next, in step P455, the usual number of times update process is performed. In this normal number of times update process, the normal number of normal times in the normal game state is incremented by 1 every time the normal game state is executed. Update the number of symbol wins.

  In addition, by performing a process of adding 1 to the number counter per time in the electric support store stored in the main RAM every time the hit game is executed in the normal power support state (second probability variable game state, short-time game state), Updates the number of hits for normal symbols in the normal power support state.

  It should be noted that a total number counter per universal figure is provided separately from the number counter per normal figure and the number counter per common figure in electric support, and when the winning game is executed, a process of adding 1 to the total number counter per hit is performed. Alternatively, it is also possible to update only the total number of hits counter without providing the number counter for normal and normal times and the number counter for normal times of electric support.

  Next, in Step P456, a renewal number update process is performed. In this extended game number update process, when a big hit game (first win) occurs in the normal game state, 1 is set in the extended game number counter stored in the main RAM, and the subsequent probability change game state and continuation of the short-time game state are continued. Every time a big hit game is generated, the number of consecutive hits of the big hit game is updated by performing a process of adding 1 to the extended game number counter.

  Next, in Step P457, the probability variation transition frequency update process is performed. In this probability change transition number update process, a process of adding 1 to a probability change transition number counter stored in the main RAM every time the probability change game state (first probability change game state, second probability change game state) is changed after the jackpot game ends. To update the number of transitions to the probable gaming state.

  It should be noted that the probability change transition number counter may be updated only when the first certain change game state is entered, or the probability change transition number counter may be updated only when the second probability change game state is entered. .

  Next, in step P458, the time-shifted number of times update process is performed, and the current game information update process is terminated. In this time-short transition number update process, the number of transitions to the short-time game state is calculated by performing a process of adding 1 to the time-short transition number counter stored in the main RAM every time the state shifts to the short-time game state after the end of the big hit game. Update.

  In addition, the above-mentioned various counters (ordinary winning opening winning counter, starting opening winning counter, gate passing counter, normal counter count, normal support counter counter, probability change transition counter, time shift transition The number counter, etc.) is reset to 0 in the initialization process of step P6 executed after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and thus shows various numerical values during the power-on period of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be reset to 0 every elapse of a predetermined period (several hours, several weeks, several months, etc.) after the start of addition (update).

<Game information output setting process of main controller>
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the game information output setting process of the main controller 100, and is executed in the timer interrupt process described above. The game information (game information signal) output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of normal game information (normal game information signal) output in parallel communication format using a plurality of output terminals, and a plurality of output terminals. There are a plurality of special game information (special game information signals) that are used and output in a serial communication format.

  First, in Step P501, it is determined whether or not there is an output timing among the normal game information. If there is no output timing (P501: NO), the process proceeds to Step P503. On the other hand, if there is an output timing (P501: YES), in step P502, the output information of the normal game information at the output timing is set in the first external output area of the main RAM. Thereby, the output of the normal game information signal to the outside is started.

  Next, in Step P503, it is determined whether or not there is a piece of normal game information that has reached an output stop timing. If there is no output stop timing (P503: NO), the process proceeds to Step P505. On the other hand, if there is an output stop timing (P503: YES), in step P504, the normal game information output information at the output stop timing is cleared from the first external output area of the main RAM. As a result, the output of the normal game information signal to the outside is stopped.

  Next, in step P505, it is determined whether there is any special game information that has reached the output timing. If there is no output timing (P505: NO), the current game information output setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an output timing (P505: YES), in step P506, the output information of the special game information at the output timing is set in the second external output area of the main RAM. As a result, the special game information signal is output to the outside.

<Description of game information signal>
FIG. 17 shows the types (types) of game information signals output from the output terminals (first terminal to eleventh terminal) provided on the external output terminal board 86, the output timing (output trigger) of the game information signals, It is a figure which shows the output period of a game information signal. The first terminal to the eighth terminal are output terminals for outputting a normal game signal, and the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal are output terminals for outputting a special game signal.

  The first terminal is an error signal (frame opening error signal, abnormal winning error signal, magnetic error signal, radio wave error signal) indicating that a predetermined error (frame opening error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error) has occurred. Are common output terminals that are output over a predetermined period.

The frame opening error signal is output when the opening of the inner frame 4 or the glass frame 7 is detected, and the output period is when the inner frame 4 and the glass frame 7 are opened. That is, the output stop timing is when the closing of the inner frame 4 and the glass frame 7 is detected.
The abnormal winning error signal has an output timing when an abnormal winning is detected, and an output period is 60 seconds from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is 60 seconds after the start of output.

The magnetic error signal has an output timing when magnetism exceeding a predetermined threshold is detected, and an output period is 60 seconds from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is 60 seconds after the start of output.
The radio wave error signal has an output timing when a radio wave having a predetermined frequency is detected, and the output period is 60 seconds from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is 60 seconds after the start of output.

  When a plurality of errors occur at the same time, the output periods of the plurality of error signals overlap. However, the errors may be output in the order in which the errors occur. Further, no error signal is output from the first terminal when a right-handed error occurs, but an error signal may be output for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) when a right-handed error occurs.

  The second terminal is an output terminal from which a payout signal indicating that a unit number (for example, 10) of game balls is actually paid out is output. The payout signal has an output timing when payout of a unit number of game balls is completed, and an output period is 16 ms from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is when 16 ms elapses from the output start.

  The third terminal is an output terminal from which a payout schedule signal indicating that payout of a unit number (for example, 10) of game balls has been determined is output. The payout schedule signal has an output timing when payout of a unit number of game balls is determined, and an output period is 16 ms from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is when 16 ms elapses from the output start.

  In the fourth terminal, a jackpot game (games per 2 rounds normal short games 1 to 4, games per 2 rounds probable shorts, games per 8 rounds probable lengths, games per 10 rounds probable lengths, games per 15 rounds probable lengths) is executed. This is an output terminal that outputs a jackpot signal indicating that The jackpot signal is the output timing at the start of the jackpot game, and the output period is during the jackpot game. In other words, the output stop timing is the end of the jackpot game.

  The fifth terminal is a short hit indicating that a short hit game (two rounds of normal short win games 1 to 4 and two rounds probable short win games) is being executed among the big hit games with a short opening time of the big prize opening 54. This is an output terminal that outputs a medium signal. The short hit / medium signal has an output timing at the start of the short hit game, and an output period during the short hit game. That is, the output stop timing is the end of the short hit game.

  The sixth terminal is an output terminal for outputting a short-time / medium-time signal indicating that the power transmission support state (time-short game state) is established. The short-time / medium-time signal has an output timing at the start of the ordinary power support state (short-time gaming state) and an output period during the ordinary power support state. That is, the output stop timing is the end of the ordinary power support state.

  The seventh terminal is an output terminal from which a start opening winning signal indicating that a game ball has won the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 46 is output. The start opening winning signal has an output timing when a game ball wins the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 46, and an output period is 16 ms from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is when 16 ms elapses from the output start.

  The eighth terminal is an output terminal from which a symbol determination signal indicating that the special symbol variation display has ended (stopped display) is output. The symbol determination signal has an output timing when the special symbol variation display ends, and an output period of 16 ms from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is when 16 ms elapses from the output start.

  The ninth terminal is an output terminal from which an information type signal indicating the type of special game information is output. The information type signal has an output period of 64 ms from each output timing described later (see FIG. 18). That is, the output stop timing is 64 ms after the start of output.

  The tenth terminal is an output terminal from which a numerical information signal indicating the details of the special game information corresponding to the information type signal is output. The numerical information signal has an output period of 64 ms from each output timing described later (see FIG. 18). That is, the output stop timing is 64 ms after the start of output.

  The eleventh terminal is an output terminal from which a timing signal for notifying the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the acquisition (output) timing of the information type signal and the numerical information signal is output. The timing signal has an output period of 64 ms from each output timing described later (see FIG. 18). That is, the output stop timing is 64 ms after the start of output.

<Explanation of special game information signal>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the details of the information type signal and the numerical information signal constituting the special game information signal, and the output timing (output trigger).

  The information type signal is an 8-bit (1 byte) data signal indicating the type (type) of the special game information, and the numerical information signal is 8 bits (1 byte) indicating the details (numeric value) of the special game information. From the external output terminal board 86, three types of information type signal, numerical information signal and timing signal are outputted as a set.

  The types of special game information include normal winning mouth winning number information, ordinary winning mouth winning ball number information, first special figure hold number information, first start opening prize ball number information, second special figure hold number information, normal 2nd start opening prize number information, 2nd starting opening prize ball number information, special figure scheduled stop pattern information, special figure scheduled change pattern information, special figure stop pattern information, special figure change pattern information, round number information, large winning opening Opening time information, Grand prize winning ball number information, Grand prize winning number information, Gate passing number information, Common figure holding number information, Common figure stop pattern information, Common figure variation pattern information, Normal medium normal figure number of times information, There are information on the number of times per map in power support, information on the number of consecutive times, information on the number of transitions to probability variation, information on the probability variation limit rotational speed information, information on the number of transitions in short time, speed limit rotational speed information, and error occurrence information.

  The normal winning opening number-of-wins information is information indicating the number of game balls won in the normal winning opening 44, and the time of winning the game balls in the normal winning opening 44 is the output timing. The normal winning award winning number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of normal winning award winnings and a numerical information signal indicating the value (0 to 255) of the above-described normal winning award winning number counter.

  The information on the number of winning balls in the normal winning opening is information indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game balls in the normal winning opening 44, and the time of winning the game balls in the normal winning opening 44 is the output timing. . The normal winning award winning ball number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of normal winning award winning balls and a numerical information signal indicating 10 winning ball numbers set in the normal winning award opening 44. Yes.

  The first special figure reservation number information is information indicating the first special figure reservation number stored in the main RAM, and the output timing is when the first special figure reservation number changes. The first special figure hold number information is based on an information type signal indicating the first special figure hold number and a numerical information signal indicating the first special figure hold number (0 to 4) stored in the main RAM. It is configured.

  The first starting opening prize ball number information is information indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first starting opening 45, and the timing of winning the gaming balls to the first starting opening 45 is the output timing. It has become. The first starting opening prize ball number information is based on an information type signal indicating the number of first starting opening prize balls and a numerical information signal indicating three award balls set in the first starting opening 45. It is configured.

  The second special figure hold number information is information indicating the second special figure hold number stored in the main RAM, and the output timing is when the second special figure hold number changes. The second special figure hold number information is based on an information type signal indicating the second special figure hold number and a numerical information signal indicating the second special figure hold number (0 to 4) stored in the main RAM. It is configured.

  The normal second start opening winning number information is information indicating the number of game balls won in the second starting opening 46 in the normal gaming state, and the output timing is when the game ball wins the second start opening. . The normal second starting port winning number information is based on the information type signal indicating the normal second starting port winning number and the numerical information signal indicating the value (0 to 255) of the above-described starting port winning number counter. It is configured.

  The second starting opening prize ball number information is information indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting opening 46, and the timing of winning the gaming balls to the second starting opening 46 is the output timing. It has become. The second starting opening prize ball number information is based on an information type signal indicating the number of second starting opening prize balls and a numerical information signal indicating one winning ball number set in the second starting opening 46. It is configured.

  The special figure scheduled stop symbol information is information indicating a pre-determination result of the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol determination random number, and the time of winning the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 46 is the output timing. Yes. Special figure scheduled stop symbol information includes an information type signal indicating that it is a special figure scheduled stop symbol, and a pre-determined result of the special figure stopped symbol (losing, 2 round normal short hit symbol, 2 round probability variable short hit symbol, 8 round A symbol per probability variation length, a symbol per 10 round probability variation length, or a symbol per 15 round probability variation length).

  The special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern information is information indicating the result of prior determination of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number, and the output timing is when a game ball is won at the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 46. The special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern information is composed of an information type signal indicating that it is a special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, and a numerical information signal indicating a pre-determined result of the special figure fluctuation pattern (any of patterns 0 to 38). Yes.

  The special symbol stop symbol information is information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol determination random number, and the output timing is when the variation of the special symbol starts. Special figure stop symbol information includes information type signal indicating that it is a special figure stop symbol, and the determination result of special figure stop symbol (losing, 2 round normal short hit symbol, 2 round probability variable per symbol, 8 round probability variable per symbol And a numerical information signal indicating a symbol per 10-round probability variation length or a symbol per 15-round probability variation length).

  The special figure variation pattern information is information indicating the determination result of the special figure variation pattern determination random number, and the special symbol variation start time is the output timing. The special figure fluctuation pattern information is composed of an information type signal indicating a special figure fluctuation pattern and a numerical information signal indicating a determination result of the special figure fluctuation pattern (any of patterns 0 to 38).

  The round number information is information indicating the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game, and the output timing is the start time of the jackpot game (opening). The round number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of rounds and a numerical information signal indicating the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game (2 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, or 15 rounds). ing.

  The special winning opening time information is information indicating the opening time (long or short) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game, and the output timing is the start time of the opening and the start time of the interval. The special winning opening opening time information is composed of an information type signal indicating that it is a special winning opening open time and a numerical information signal indicating a special winning opening open time (short opening, long opening).

  The information on the number of winning balls for winning a prize is information indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of gaming balls to the winning prize opening 54, and the timing of winning the gaming balls to the winning prize opening 54 is the output timing. . The prize winning ball number information is composed of an information type signal indicating that it is the number of winning prize balls and a numerical information signal indicating 15 which is the number of winning balls set in the big prize opening 54. Yes.

  The information on the number of winning prizes is information indicating the number of game balls won in the winning game 54 in one round game, and the end timing of the round game is the output timing. The big prize winning number information includes an information type signal indicating the number of big winning prizes and a numerical information signal indicating the value (0-255) of the above-mentioned big winning number counter.

  The gate passage number information is information indicating the number of game balls that have passed the usual gate 51, and the output timing is when the game ball passes to the usual gate 51. The gate passage number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of gate passages and a numerical information signal indicating the value (0 to 255) of the gate passage number counter described above.

  The general-purpose hold number information is information indicating the general-purpose hold number stored in the main RAM, and the change timing of the general-purpose hold number is the output timing. The pending map number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of reserved maps, and numerical information indicating the number of reserved maps (0 to 4) stored in the main RAM.

  The normal symbol stop symbol information is information indicating the determination result of the winning determination random number and the winning symbol determination random number, and the output timing is the normal symbol variation start time. The information on the stoppage information is the information type signal indicating that it is a stoppage symbol, and the determination result of the stoppage of the stoppage (designs for losing, symbol for short opening, symbol for short & long opening, symbol for long & long opening) Any one of them).

  The regular pattern variation pattern information is information indicating the determination result of the regular pattern variation pattern determination random number, and the normal symbol variation start time is the output timing. The normal fluctuation pattern information is composed of an information type signal indicating a normal fluctuation pattern and a numerical information signal indicating a determination result (patterns 0 to 20) of the normal fluctuation pattern.

  The information on the number of hits in the normal game is information indicating the number of hit games that have occurred in the normal game state, and the output timing is the start time of the hit game that occurs as a result of the winning lottery in the normal game state. Yes. The information on the number of times of normal normal maps is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of times of normal normal maps and a numerical information signal indicating the value of the above-mentioned counter of normal normal maps (0 to 255). ing.

  The number of times per game during the power support is information indicating the number of hit games that have occurred in the normal power support state (short-time game state), and the number of hit games that are generated as a result of the winning lottery in the general power support state. The start time is the output timing. The information about the number of times per electric support during normal support includes an information type signal indicating the number of times per electric support during normal support, and a numerical information signal indicating the value (0-255) of the number of times per electric support during normal support. It is composed of

  The second start opening number-of-times information is information indicating the number of times the second start opening 46 is opened in the winning game, and the output timing is the start time of the winning game. The second start opening number of times information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of times of opening the second start port and a numerical information signal indicating the number of times the first start port 46 is opened (1-2) in the winning game. ing.

  The consecutive game count information is information indicating the number of jackpot games continuously generated while the probability variation game state and the short-time game state are continued with the jackpot game occurring in the normal game state as the first time, and the probability variation game state The output timing is the start of the short-time gaming state. The consecutive resort number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of consecutive resorts and a numerical information signal indicating the value of the consecutive resort number counter (0 to 255).

  The probability variation number-of-times information is information indicating the number of times of transition to the probability variation gaming state, and the output timing is the start time of the probability variation gaming state. The probability variation transition number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the probability variation transition number and a numerical information signal indicating the value (0 to 255) of the probability variation transition counter described above.

  The probability variation limit rotational speed information is information indicating the number of times of the special symbol variation display that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state, and the output timing is the start of the probability variation gaming state. Probability variable speed information consists of an information type signal that indicates the probability variable speed, and a numerical information signal that indicates the number of special symbols that can be executed in the probability variation game state. Has been.

  The time-short transition number information is information indicating the number of transitions to the time-short gaming state, and the output timing is the start time of the time-short gaming state. The time-shifted number of times information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of times of time-shifted, and a numerical information signal indicating the value (0 to 255) of the time-shifted number of times counter described above.

  The short-time limit rotation number information is information indicating the number of times of special symbol variable display that can be executed in the short-time gaming state, and the output timing is the start of the short-time gaming state. The speed limit speed information includes an information type signal indicating that it is a time limit speed limit and the number of times of special display variable display that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state (30 times, 50 times, or 100 times) ) Indicating a numerical information signal.

  The error occurrence information is information indicating that various errors (frame opening error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, right-handed error) have occurred, and the output timing is when various errors occur. The error occurrence information includes an information type signal indicating an error occurrence and a numerical information signal indicating the type of error that has occurred.

  In this way, special game information (information type signal, numerical information signal) is output via the external output terminal board 86 at various output timings, so that specific (detailed) game information corresponding to the progress of the game can be obtained. It is possible to output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a hall computer, an island computer, a call lamp, a rental device, etc.). As a result, it is possible to analyze detailed game information outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 or to perform a predetermined performance on island facilities using the detailed game information.

  It should be noted that the special game information includes information on the number of game balls that have been won in the normal game port 44 for each gaming state and information on the number of game balls that have been won in the first start port 45. Information on the number of winnings, the number of first starting port winnings by state indicating the number of gaming balls won in the first starting port 45 for each gaming state, and the number of gaming balls won in the second starting port 46 for each gaming state The second start opening winning number information for each state may be set and output from the external output terminal board 86.

  Also, instead of the special figure scheduled stop symbol information or the special figure stop symbol information, the jackpot determination random number information indicating the random number of the jackpot determination random number or the jackpot symbol determination random number information indicating the random number of the jackpot determination random number is output. Alternatively, instead of the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern information or the special figure fluctuation pattern information, special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number information indicating the random value of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number may be output.

  Further, instead of the general symbol stop symbol information, hit determination random number information indicating the random number value of the hit determination random number or hit symbol determination random number information indicating the random value of the hit symbol determination random number may be output. Instead of the fluctuation pattern information, the normal fluctuation pattern determination random number information indicating the random number value of the normal fluctuation pattern determination random number may be output.

  Also, instead of outputting the normal winning mouth prize ball information, the first starting mouth prize ball number information, the second starting mouth prize ball number information, and the large winning mouth prize ball number information for each winning game ball, the power is turned on. You may make it output only at the timing of the time or the time of the first prize winning.

  Further, the consecutive game number information may be output at the start of the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game, instead of being output at the start of the probability variation game state or the short-time game state.

<Example of special game information output>
Next, examples of output of special game information (information type signal, numerical information signal, timing signal) at various output timings will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The information type signal and the numerical information signal are output from the ninth terminal and the tenth terminal of the external output terminal board 86, respectively, and the output bit changes from 0 to 7 every 8 ms from the start of output, and 64 ms elapses. At that time, output of 8 bits (1 byte) is completed.

  Further, the timing signal is output from the eleventh terminal of the external output terminal plate 86, is normally ON (high level), and is OFF (low level) during the output of the information type signal and the numerical information signal. Thus, the output timing (reading start, reading end) of the special game information signal is notified to the outside.

  FIG. 19 shows the timing when the normal winning opening winning number information and the normal winning opening winning ball number information are output from the external output terminal board 86 (the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal) when the game ball is won in the normal winning opening 44. It is a chart.

  When a game ball is detected by the normal winning opening switch 44a at the timing of T1, an information type signal indicating the number of normal winning openings and a numerical information signal indicating the value (25) of the normal winning opening winning counter The timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T2, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the normal winning slot winning number information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T2 at the timing of T3, the information type signal indicating the number of the normal winning mouth winning balls and the number of winning balls set in the ordinary winning mouth 44 Output of numerical information signals indicating certain 10 is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T4, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal is completed, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the normal winning award winning ball number information is completed.

  As described above, when the game ball is detected by the normal game port switch 44a, the normal game port winning ball number information or the normal game port winning ball number information is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. It is possible to grasp specific information such as the winning situation of the game ball at the normal winning opening 44.

  In addition, since the information on the number of winnings in the normal winning opening that changes according to the progress of the game is output in preference to the information on the number of winning balls in the normal winning opening that does not change according to the progress of the game, Production and the like can be performed efficiently.

  FIG. 20 shows the first special figure holding number information, special figure scheduled stop symbol information, special figure scheduled fluctuations from the external output terminal board 86 (the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal) when a game ball is won at the first start opening 45. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting pattern information and 1st starting opening prize number information.

  When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 45a at the timing of T1, an information type signal indicating the number of first special figure reservations and the number of first special figure reservations stored in the main RAM (2 Output of a numerical information signal indicating the number of signals is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T2, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the first special figure reservation number information is completed.

  Subsequently, at the timing of T3, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T2, the information type signal indicating the special figure scheduled stop symbol and the 10-round probability change that is the result of the preliminary determination of the special figure stop symbol. The output of the numerical information signal indicating the symbol per long is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T4, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the special figure scheduled stop symbol information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T4 at the timing of T5, an information type signal indicating a special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern and a pattern 18 which is a preliminary determination result of the special figure fluctuation pattern are displayed. The output of the numerical information signal shown is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T6, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the special figure scheduled variation pattern information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T6 at the timing of T7, the information type signal indicating the number of first starting opening prize balls and the winning ball set to the first starting opening 45 The output of the numerical information signal indicating the number 3 is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T8, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the first starting opening prize number information is completed.

  As described above, when the first starting port switch 45a detects a game ball, the first special figure hold number information, the special figure scheduled stop symbol information, the special figure scheduled variation pattern information, and the first starting port prize ball number information are displayed. By outputting to the outside of the machine 1, it is possible to grasp specific information such as the change status of the number of first special figure hold and the result of prior judgment of the special figure judgment information outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

  In addition, the first special figure hold number information, special figure scheduled stop symbol information, and special figure scheduled variation pattern information that change according to the progress of the game have priority over the first start mouth ball number information that does not change according to the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform analysis, performance, etc. outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Although not shown, at the time of detection of a game ball by the second start opening switch 46a, the second special figure reservation number information, special figure scheduled stop symbol information, special figure scheduled variation pattern information, and the second starting opening Since the information on the number of prize balls is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 grasps specific information such as the change status of the number of second special figure holdings and the prejudgment result of the special figure judgment information. It becomes possible to do.

  FIG. 21 shows the first special figure holding number information, the special figure stop symbol information, and the special figure from the external output terminal board 86 (the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal) at the start of the variable symbol special display based on the first special figure reservation. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting fluctuation pattern information.

  When the change display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T1, the information type signal indicating the first special figure holding number and the first special figure holding number (1) stored in the main RAM Is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T2, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the first special figure reservation number information is completed.

  Subsequently, at the timing of T3, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T2, the information type signal indicating that it is a special figure stop symbol, and the 10-round probability variable length that is the determination result of the special figure stop symbol The output of the numerical information signal indicating the symbol is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T4, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the special figure stop symbol information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T4 at the timing of T5, an information type signal indicating a special figure fluctuation pattern and a numerical value indicating the pattern 18 which is a determination result of the special figure fluctuation pattern. The output of the information signal is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T6, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the special figure variation pattern information is completed.

  Thus, the first special figure reservation number information, the special figure stop symbol information, and the special figure fluctuation pattern information at the start of the change display of the special symbol based on the first special figure reservation (when the first special figure reservation number changes) Is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to grasp specific information such as the change status of the number of first special figure hold and the judgment result of the special figure judgment information outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Become.

  Although not shown in the drawings, at the start of the special symbol variable display based on the second special figure hold (when the second special figure hold number changes), the second special figure hold number information and the special figure stop symbol information are displayed. And the special figure variation pattern information is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, specific information such as the change status of the second special figure holding number and the judgment result of the special figure judgment information It becomes possible to grasp.

  FIG. 22 shows round number information, grand prize opening time information, and grand prize winning ball information from the external output terminal board 86 (the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal) from the opening to the first round in the game per 10 round probability variation length. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting.

  When the opening period of the jackpot game is started at the timing of T1, the output of the information type signal indicating the number of rounds and the numerical information signal indicating the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game (10 rounds) are started. Then, the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T2, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the round number information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T2 at the timing of T3, the output of the information type signal indicating the opening time of the big winning opening and the numerical information signal indicating the long opening that is the opening time of the big winning opening. The timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T4, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the special winning opening opening time information is completed.

  Subsequently, at the timing of T5, the first round game is started, and at the timing of T6, when a game ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 54a, an information type signal indicating the number of big prize winning prize balls, And the output of the numerical information signal which shows 15 which is the number of prize balls set to the special winning opening 54 is started, and a timing signal switches from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T7, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the prize winning ball number information is completed.

  In this way, by outputting the number-of-rounds information and the winning opening opening time information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the round executed in the jackpot game outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to grasp specific information such as the number and the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in the round game to be started.

  In addition, when the game ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 54a, the special prize mouth number information is output, so that specific information such as the number of prize balls set in the special prize opening 54 outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. Can be grasped.

  FIG. 23 shows a big prize opening from the external output terminal board 86 (the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal) during the interval period in the game per 10 round probability variation length, and when the game ball passes to the general gate 51 during the interval period. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting winning number information, special winning opening opening time information, gate passing number information, and usual figure holding number information.

  At the timing of T1, when the jackpot game interval period is started, an information type signal indicating the number of winning prize winning numbers and a numerical information signal indicating the value (9) of the winning prize winning number counter Output is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T2, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the winning prize winning number information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T2 at the timing of T3, an information type signal indicating that it is a big winning opening opening time, and numerical information indicating a long opening that is a big winning opening opening time. The signal output is started and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T4, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the special winning opening opening time information is completed.

  Subsequently, when a gaming ball is detected by the gate switch 51a at the timing of T5, output of an information type signal indicating the number of gate passages and a numerical information signal indicating the value (four) of the gate passage number counter is started. The timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T6, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the gate passing number information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T6 at the timing of T7, an information type signal indicating the number of pending maps and the number of pending maps (4) stored in the main RAM. ) Is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T8, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the general-purpose hold number information is completed.

  In this way, by outputting the winning prize opening number information and the winning prize opening time information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the start of the interval period, outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning prize opening in this round game is performed. It is possible to grasp specific information such as the number of game balls won in 54 and the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in the round game to be started.

  In addition, when the game ball is detected by the gate switch 51a, the gate passing number information and the general figure holding number information are output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the gaming ball to the general figure gate 51 is external to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to grasp specific information such as the passing state of the car and the change state of the number of reserved drawings.

  In FIG. 24, during the ending period of the game 4 per two rounds of normal short, the winning prize opening number information, the consecutive number of times information, and the short time limit rotation number information are output from the external output terminal board 86 (the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal). It is a timing chart in the case of doing.

  At the timing of T1, when the ending period of the jackpot game is started, an information type signal indicating the number of winning a prize winning and a numerical information signal indicating a value (10) of the winning prize winning number counter Output is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T2, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the winning prize winning number information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T2 at the timing of T3, an information type signal indicating the number of consecutive games and a numerical information signal indicating the value of the consecutive games counter (twice) The timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T4, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the number of consecutive times information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T4 at the timing of T5, it is executed in the information type signal indicating that it is the speed limit speed limit and the time-saving gaming state (the ordinary power support state) that will be generated in the future. Output of a numerical information signal indicating the number of possible special symbol fluctuation displays (100 rotations) is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T6, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the time limit speed limit information is completed.

  In this way, the final round game is performed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by outputting the winning prize winning number information, the consecutive number of times information, and the hourly speed limit rotation number information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the start of the ending period. Specific information such as the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 54, the number of consecutive games where a big hit game has occurred, and the number of special symbols that can be executed in the short-time game state starting from now on Can be grasped.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a modification of the output form of special game information. This modification differs from the above embodiment in that the tenth and eleventh terminals are not provided on the external output terminal plate 86, and the special game information is output only from the ninth terminal.

  The special game information in this modification is output from the 9th terminal with bits 0 to 7 indicating stop bit, information type and numerical information, and stop bit as one frame, and start bit and data every 8 ms from the start of output. Bits 0 to 7 are changed to stop bits, and output of 8 bits (1 byte) is completed when 80 ms elapses.

  This eliminates the need for a timing signal, thereby reducing the number of output terminals for outputting special game information on the external output terminal board 86, and reducing costs.

<Control processing of sub-control device>
Next, control processing of the sub-control device 300 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The control process of the sub-control device 300 includes a main process and a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sub control device 300. When operating power is supplied from the power supply device 400, a system reset occurs and a security check of the sub CPU is performed, and then the following processing is performed. Is called.

  First, in step P1000, interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption is set, and in step P1001, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, an effect control program is read from the sub ROM and a process for initializing stored information in the sub RAM is performed.

  Next, in step P1002, interrupt permission for permitting timer interruption is set, and in step P1003, sub-random number update processing is performed. In this sub-random number update process, a process for updating various effect random numbers used when determining various effects and the like is performed. Thereafter, the sub-random number update process in step P1003 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing of sub controller>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control device 300. The clock pulse is input from the CTC circuit every predetermined cycle (4 ms), and the following processing is performed.

  First, in step P1050, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the variation time of the special symbol's variable display effect, the effective time related to the operation effect, the stop time of the effect symbol, the effect time related to the jackpot game effect, the variable time of the variable symbol display effect of the normal symbol, the hit game effect The timer for measuring the production time etc. related to is updated.

  Next, in step P1100, input processing is performed. In this input process, input of detection signals (input signals) from various switches such as the selection button switch 24a, the effect button switch 25a, and the position detection switch of the movable effect device 74 is monitored, and predetermined data is input when there is an input. Perform processing to set.

  Next, in step P1150, command analysis processing is performed. In this command analysis processing, it is analyzed whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 100 has been normally received. If the command received normally is an information-related command (pending number command, gaming state command, etc.), Information corresponding to the command is set in the sub-RAM, and a special figure / general figure game command (customer waiting state command, advance judgment command, special figure stop pattern command, special figure variation pattern command, special figure confirmation command, general figure In the case of a stop symbol command, a common symbol variation pattern command, a universal symbol confirmation command, an opening command, a round number command, an interval command, an ending command, etc.), processing for setting the command in the reception command area of the sub-RAM is performed.

  Next, in step P1200, prefetch effect processing is performed. In this pre-reading effect process, it is determined whether or not a prior determination command has been received with reference to the reception command area of the sub-RAM, and if received, a jackpot game over one or more variable display effects. Pre-reading effects (such as pre-reading continuous notice effect, pre-read icon change effect, pre-read zone effect, etc.) A type is determined and processing for executing a prefetch effect is performed.

  Next, in step P1250, special figure game effect processing is performed. In this special figure game effect processing, commands related to special figure games (special figure stop symbol command, special figure variation pattern command, special figure confirmation command, opening command, round number command, interval command are referred to the received command area of the sub RAM. , An ending command, etc.) is received, and a process for executing a special figure game effect (special figure variation display effect, jackpot effect, etc.) corresponding to the received command is performed. Details will be described later.

  Next, in step P1300, ordinary game effect processing is performed. In this ordinary game effect processing, commands related to ordinary game are received by referring to the reception command area of the sub RAM (such as ordinary diagram stop symbol command, ordinary diagram variation pattern command, ordinary diagram confirmation command, opening command, ending command, etc.). It is determined whether or not the game is performed, and a process for executing a general game effect (such as a normal map variation display effect, a hit effect) corresponding to the received command is performed. Details will be described later.

  Next, in step P1350, error notification processing is performed. In this error notification process, an error occurrence command (frame opening error command, abnormal winning error command, magnetic error command, radio wave error command, right-handed error command) or error cancellation command (frame opening) is referenced with reference to the reception command area of the sub RAM. It is determined whether or not an error resolution command or the like has been received, and processing for executing error notification corresponding to the received command is performed.

Next, in step P1400, special effect execution processing is performed. In this special effect execution process, it is determined whether or not information that triggers the execution of the special effect has been input from the external device to the input receiving device 87, and when information that triggers the execution of the special effect is input. Processing for executing special effects is performed. Details will be described later.
Finally, in step P1450, an output process is performed, and the current timer interrupt process is terminated. In this output process, control data is output to various effect devices (selection button device 23, effect button device 25, frame light emitting unit 13, rotary light emitting unit 14, movable effect device 74), effect command information to VDP, and the like. Process to send. As a result, the production sound is output from the speaker 12, or the production image is displayed on the first image display device 71 and the second image display device 72.

<Special game effect processing of sub-control device 300>
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special figure game effect process of the sub-control device 300, and is executed in the timer interrupt process described above.

  First, in step P1251, the variation effect process data stored in the sub-RAM is referred to, and in step P1252, the branch destination process is specified from the variation effect process data.

  If the variation effect process data = 0, the special figure variation start command reception waiting process is performed in step P1253, and the current special figure game effect process is terminated. In this special figure change start command reception waiting process, it is determined whether or not a special figure change start command (special figure stop pattern command, special figure change pattern command) has been received with reference to the reception command area of the sub-RAM. When a special figure change start command is received, a process of setting 1 to the change effect process data is performed.

  Further, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting state command has been received by referring to the reception command area of the sub RAM, and when a customer waiting state command has been received, a customer waiting state has elapsed after a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed. A process for performing the performance is performed.

  If the variation effect process data = 1, in step P1254, a special figure variation display effect start process is performed, and the current special figure game effect process ends. In this special figure variation display effect start processing, the type of the effect symbol to be displayed and the special figure variation display effect pattern are determined based on a special figure variation start command (special figure stop symbol command, special figure variation pattern command), Control is performed to determine whether or not various notice effects and operation effects are executed and the type of effect to be executed, and to start a special figure variation display effect (fluctuation display of the effect symbol and the fourth symbol). Perform processing to set.

  In the case of the variation effect process data = 2, in step P1255, the special figure variation display effect processing is performed, and the current special figure game effect process is terminated. In this special figure game production process, the switching timing of each fluctuation production state (high speed fluctuation, low speed fluctuation, reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, special reach fluctuation, re-lottery fluctuation, fluctuation temporary stop, etc.) in the special figure fluctuation display effect pattern is set. At the same time, the end of the variable display effect time is determined, and when the variable display effect time ends, a process of setting 3 to the variable effect process data is performed.

  If the variation effect process data = 3, in step P1256, the special figure variation display effect stop process is performed, and the current special figure game effect process is terminated. In this special figure variation display effect stop process, it is determined whether or not a special figure confirmation command has been received with reference to the reception command area of the sub-RAM, and if it has been received, the effect design temporarily stopped is recorded. While stopping, control which stops the 4th symbol fluctuation display and ends the special figure fluctuation display effect is performed.

  Further, when the lost effect symbol is actually stopped, 0 is set in the variation effect process data, and when the jackpot effect symbol is permanently stopped, the variable effect process data is set to 4.

  In the case of the variation effect process data = 4, in step P1257, the jackpot effect process is performed, and the current special figure effect process is terminated. In this jackpot effect process, it is determined whether or not an opening command, a round number command, an interval command, and an ending command are received with reference to the received command area of the sub-RAM, and a jackpot effect corresponding to the received command ( Control for executing an opening effect, a round effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) is performed, and when the ending effect is started, a process of setting 5 to the variable effect process data is performed.

  When the variation effect process data = 5, in step P1258, a big hit effect end process is performed, and the current special figure effect process is ended. In this jackpot effect end process, it is determined whether or not the ending effect is ended, and when the ending effect is ended, a process of setting 0 to the variable effect process data is performed.

<Sub-control device general game effect processing>
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the general game effect process of the sub-control device 300, and is executed in the timer interrupt process described above.

  First, in step P1301, the ordinary drawing effect processing data stored in the sub-RAM is referred to, and in step P1302, the branch destination process is specified from the ordinary drawing effect processing data.

  If the ordinary drawing effect process data = 0, the ordinary figure change start command reception waiting process is performed in step P1303, and the current ordinary figure game effect process is terminated. In this normal figure change start command reception waiting process, it is determined whether or not a general figure change start command (normal figure stop pattern command, universal figure change pattern command) has been received with reference to the reception command area of the sub-RAM. When the common figure change start command is received, processing for setting 1 in the general figure effect process data is performed.

  If the ordinary drawing effect process data = 1, the ordinary drawing effect start process is performed in step P1304, and the current ordinary drawing game effect process is terminated. In this general drawing production start process, the type of the normal production symbol and the general drawing fluctuation display production pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined based on the universal drawing variation start command (general drawing stop symbol command, universal diagram variation pattern command). A control for starting the figure variation display effect is performed, and a process of setting 2 to the general diagram effect process data is performed.

  If the ordinary drawing effect processing data = 2, in step P1305, the ordinary drawing effect processing is performed, and the current ordinary drawing game effect processing is terminated. In this normal drawing production process, the switching timing of each fluctuation production state (high-speed fluctuation, low-speed fluctuation, fluctuation temporary stop, etc.) in the normal figure fluctuation display production pattern is controlled, and the end of the normal figure fluctuation display production time is determined. When the normal map change display effect time ends, a process of setting 3 to the general map effect processing data is performed.

  If the ordinary drawing effect process data = 3, in step P1306, the ordinary drawing effect stop process is performed, and the current ordinary drawing game effect process is terminated. In this ordinary drawing production stop process, it is determined whether or not a universal figure confirmation command has been received by referring to the reception command area of the sub-RAM, and if it has been received, the ordinary production symbol that has been temporarily stopped is fully stopped. Then, the control for terminating the normal map display effect is performed.

  In addition, when the loss normal effect design is fully stopped, 0 is set in the general design effect processing data, and when the hit normal effect design is permanently stopped, 4 is set in the general diagram effect processing data. I do.

  If the ordinary drawing effect process data is 4, the winning effect process is performed in step P1307, and the current ordinary drawing game effect process is terminated. In this winning effect process, it is determined whether or not an opening command and an ending command are received with reference to the received command area of the sub-RAM, and a control for executing a winning effect according to the received command is performed.

  In addition, it is determined whether or not the ending effect is finished, and when the ending effect is finished, a process of setting 0 to the normal drawing effect process data is performed.

<Sub-control device special performance execution processing>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special effect execution process of the sub-control device 300, which is executed in the timer interrupt process described above.

  First, in step P1401, it is determined whether or not start information for prefetch special effects has been input. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first input acceptance switch 87a is turned on. If there is no input of start information for the prefetch special effect (P1401: NO), the process proceeds to step P1405. On the other hand, if start information for prefetch special effects is input (P1401: YES), execution information for prefetch special effects is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM in step P1402. Thereby, the prefetch special effect using the frame display 15 and the speaker 12 is started.

  Next, in step P1403, the end condition for the pre-reading special effect is determined by comparing the current game situation (whether waiting for customers or changing effects, etc.) with the pachinko end condition determination table (see FIG. 31). Then, in step P1404, the end condition of the prefetch special effect as the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM, and the special effect execution process of this time is ended. Details of the pachinko end condition determination table will be described later.

  As a condition for ending the pre-reading special effect, when the current game situation is waiting for customers, the pre-reading special effect is established, whichever comes first, 20 seconds from the start of the pre-reading special effect or the start of a new variable effect. If the current game situation is in the variation production, the variation production being executed + the number of current special figure reservations (first special figure hold number, second special figure hold number) end of the variable production Or until the end of jackpot variation production, whichever comes first.

  Next, in step 1405, it is determined whether or not the start information of the changing special effect has been input. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second input acceptance switch 87b is turned on. If there is no input of start information for the special effect during change (P1405: NO), the process proceeds to step P1409. On the other hand, when the start information of the changing special effect is input (P1405: YES), the execution information of the changing special effect is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM in step S1406. Thereby, the special effect during the change using the frame display 15 and the speaker 12 is started.

  Next, in step P1407, the pachinko ending condition determination table (see FIG. 31) is collated with the current game situation (whether waiting for customers or changing effects, etc.), and the ending conditions of changing special effects are determined. In step P1408, the end condition of the changing special effect that is the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM, and the current special effect execution process ends.

  As a condition for ending the special effect during change, if the current game situation is waiting for a customer, either 10 seconds after the start of the special effect during change or the start of a new change effect, whichever comes first If the current game situation is in the process of changing the loss, it has been 10 seconds since the start of the special effect in change. , Until the end of the fluctuation production being executed.

  Next, in step P1409, it is determined whether or not there is input of error special effect start information. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third input acceptance switch 87c is turned on. If there is no input of error special effect start information (P1409: NO), the process proceeds to step P1414. On the other hand, if there is input of error special effect start information (P1409: YES), if there is execution information of another special effect (prefetch special effect, changing special effect) in the sub-RAM in step P1410, The execution information is cleared, and in step P1411, the execution information of the error special effect is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM. As a result, the error special effect using the frame display 15 or the speaker is started (in place of the pre-reading special effect or the special effect during change).

  Next, in step P1412, the end condition determination table for the pachinko machine (see FIG. 31) is compared with the current game situation (whether waiting for customers or changing production, etc.) to determine the end condition of the error special effect. In step P1413, an error special effect end condition that is a determination result is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM, and the current special effect execution process ends.

  If the current game situation is waiting for a customer, the error special effect will be terminated if the error special effect is 20 seconds from the start of the error special effect, and the current game situation is a variable production. In addition, 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the error special effect.

  Next, in step P1414, it is determined whether or not a prefetch special effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not execution information for prefetch special effects is set in the sub-RAM. When the prefetch special effect is not being executed (P1414: NO), the process proceeds to Step P1418. On the other hand, if the prefetch special effect is being executed (P1414: YES), the process proceeds to step P1415.

  Next, in step P1415, it is determined whether or not the prefetch special effect end condition set in the sub-RAM is satisfied. If the pre-read special effect end condition is satisfied (P1415: YES), the pre-read special effect execution information set in the sub-RAM is cleared in step P1416, and the current special effect execution process ends. As a result, the prefetch special effect ends. On the other hand, if the end condition for the prefetch special effect is not satisfied (P1415: NO), the prefetch special effect execution process for controlling the advance of the prefetch special effect is performed in step P1417, and the special effect execution process for this time is finished. To do.

  Next, in Step P1418, it is determined whether or not the changing special effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the execution information of the changing special effect is set in the sub-RAM. If the special effect during change is not being executed (P1418: NO), the process proceeds to step P1422. On the other hand, when the changing special effect is being executed (P1418: YES), the process proceeds to Step P1419.

  Next, in Step P1419, it is determined whether or not the changing special effect end condition set in the sub-RAM is satisfied. When the changing special effect end condition is satisfied (P1419: YES), the execution information of the changing special effect set in the sub-RAM is cleared in step P1420, and the current special effect executing process is ended. . As a result, the execution of the special effect during fluctuation is completed. On the other hand, if the end condition of the changing special effect is not satisfied (P1419: NO), the changing special effect execution process for controlling the progress of the changing special effect is performed in step P1421, and the special effect execution this time is executed. The process ends.

  Next, in step P1422, it is determined whether or not error special information is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the execution information of the error special effect is set in the sub RAM. If the error special effect is not being executed (P1422: NO), the current special effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, when the error special effect is being executed (P1422: YES), the process proceeds to Step P1423.

  Next, in step P1423, it is determined whether or not an error special effect end condition set in the sub-RAM is satisfied. If the error special effect termination condition is satisfied (P1423: YES), in step P1424, the error special effect execution information set in the sub-RAM is cleared, and the current special effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the execution of the error special effect ends. On the other hand, if the termination condition for the error special effect is not satisfied (P1423: NO), in step P1425, the error special effect execution process for controlling the progress of the error special effect is performed, and the current special effect execution process is terminated. To do.

  In this way, predetermined game information (specific information) that triggers input to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the player operates as a result. When an input from an external device is received via an input receiving device 87 provided at a difficult or inoperable position, a special effect is performed. Therefore, a special effect can be executed by performing input / output with an external device. In addition, it is possible to manage whether or not the special effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the external device, and the timing to execute it.

  Further, depending on the type of input received by the input receiving device 87 (which one of the first input receiving switch 87a to the third input receiving switch 87c received the input), different types of special effects (pre-reading special effects, changing special effects) Error special effects). Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of special effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and improve the appealing power to the player.

  Further, the jackpot game is generated based on the fact that the input received from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first input for turning on the first input reception switch 87a (input of start information of the pre-read special effect). A pre-read special effect that suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game may be executed before the start of the change display of the special symbol to be (preliminary) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed and to improve the interest of the game before the variable display that the jackpot game is executed is executed. . It should be noted that a plurality of pre-read special effect production patterns are provided, and if pre-read special production start information is input, the pre-read special production production pattern is determined by lottery, and the pre-read special production is executed with the decided production pattern. It may be.

  The jackpot game is generated based on the fact that the input received from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the second input for turning on the second input reception switch 87b (input of start information of the special special effect during change). During the execution of the variable display of the special symbol to be changed, a special effect during the change is executed which suggests (notifies) that the jackpot game may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed during the variable display where the jackpot game will be executed, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, if there are multiple production patterns for changing special effects, and the start information for the changing special effects is input, the changing special effects effect pattern is determined by lottery, and the changing special effects are performed using the determined effect pattern. May be executed.

  Further, based on the fact that the input received from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the third input for turning on the third input reception switch 87c (input of the start information of the error special effect), the pachinko machine is used for a predetermined period. An error special effect informing that a predetermined error has occurred in the gaming machine 1 is executed. Therefore, the occurrence of the error can be accurately notified to the player or the employee of the game hall, and the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be enhanced. In addition, if there are multiple error special effects production patterns corresponding to the type of error, and there is input of error special production start information, error special effects are produced with the production pattern according to the type of error that has occurred. You may make it perform.

  In the present embodiment, the first input receiving switch 87a to the third input receiving switch 87c are used to receive input from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the number of input receiving switches is less than three. Alternatively, it may be a large number. For example, when only one input acceptance switch is provided, it is determined that the start information of the pre-reading special effect has been input when the number of times of turning on within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) is 1, and turned on. If the number of times is 2, it is determined that the start information of the changing special effect has been input, and if the number of times of ON is 3, the error special effect start information has been input. In addition, when two input reception switches are provided, it is determined that one of the input reception switches is turned on and the start information of the pre-reading special production is determined to be input, and when the other input reception switch is turned on, the changing special production is performed. It may be determined that there has been input of the start information, and if both input acceptance switches are turned on, it is determined that the start information of the error special effect has been input.

  Further, instead of an input reception switch that receives a physical pressing operation, an input from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be received by a non-contact input reception module that receives infrared rays, radio waves, or the like. Input from the outside of the gaming machine 1 may be received directly from the harness by an input / output interface circuit (I / O).

<End condition judgment table for pachinko>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an end condition determination table for pachinko, which is referred to in the special effect execution process described with reference to FIG.

  In the end condition determination table for pachinko, the types of special effects (look-ahead special effects, changing special effects, error special effects) and gaming status (waiting for customers, changing effects etc.) The contents of the end condition are associated with each other.

  According to the end condition determination table for pachinko, when the execution of the prefetch special effect is started during the variation effect, the variation effect being executed + the number of special figure hold (the number of the first special figure hold, the number of the second special figure hold) ) The pre-reading special effect continues until the change effect is completed, or until the end of the jackpot change effect, whichever comes first. As a result, regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is executed, the prefetch special effect is executed so as to correspond to the progress of the game, and the player's expectation that the jackpot game is executed A feeling can be raised and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

  Also, according to the end condition determination table for pachinko, when the changing special effect is started during the loss changing effect, the changing special effect continues until a predetermined time (10 seconds) elapses. When the changing special effect is started during the effect, the changing special effect is continued until the changing effect being executed ends. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed according to the period during which the changing special effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the pachinko end condition determination table, when the error special effect is started, the error special effect is produced over the same period (20 seconds) regardless of whether the customer is waiting or changing. Will continue. This makes it possible to effectively notify that an error has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect is ended when the end condition set at the start of the special effect is satisfied. However, the special effect is at least one of the pre-read special effect, the changing special effect, and the error special effect. It may be until the end information of the production is input. For example, the input reception device 87 may be provided with a fourth input reception switch, and when the fourth input reception switch is turned on, the special production end information may be input to terminate the special production being executed. When any two or three of the 1-input reception switch 87a to the third input reception switch 87c are simultaneously turned on, it is assumed that the special production end information has been input, and the special production being executed is terminated. Good.

<Examples of special look-ahead production for pachinko machines>
An example of an effect in the case where start information of prefetch special effects is simultaneously input to a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 and the prefetch special effects are executed all at once will be described with reference to FIGS.
As a premise, information input for inputting to the input receiving device so as to correspond to each of the eight pachinko gaming machines 1 (for example, 1st to 8th) installed on the game island. It is assumed that a device (corresponding to input means) is provided. Here, the description will be made by picking up the first pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the left end and the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the right end.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the first and eighth pachinko machines 1, the loss variation effect is executed with the first special figure holding number being “1”, and the frame indicator 15 Then, variation effect light emission corresponding to the loss variation effect is executed. At this time, the information input device provided corresponding to each of the input reception devices 87 of the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines 1 is not in operation.

  In this state, in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, special figure determination information for determining that the game ball is won at the first starting port 45 and is determined to be a big hit is stored in the first reserved storage area, and the first special figure reservation number is “ 2 ”, special figure scheduled stop symbol information and special figure scheduled variation pattern information indicating that a jackpot game is executed from the external output terminal board 86 of the first pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the external device is a pachinko gaming machine. Specific information that triggers input to 1 is output.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), driving signals of information input devices corresponding to the input receiving devices 87 of the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines 1 are output from the external device that has received the specific information. As a result, the first actuator of the information input device is actuated, and the first input reception switch 87a of the input reception device 87 is pressed to turn on (the start information of the pre-read special effect is input), and the first to eighth pachinko games The pre-reading special effect is started in each of the machines 1, and the character information of “Attach time” is displayed on the frame display 15. At this time, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the stop effect for notifying the loss is executed after the execution time of the loss change effect has elapsed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special figure holding number is subtracted to “1” to start the loss variation effect, and the prefetch special effect continues. Executed. Further, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the stop effect for notifying the loss is executed after the execution time of the loss variation effect has elapsed, and the pre-reading special effect is continued.

  When a predetermined time elapses in this state, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, a stop effect for notifying the loss is executed after the execution time of the loss variation effect has elapsed, Pre-reading special production continues. Further, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special figure reservation number is subtracted to “0” to start the loss variation effect, and the prefetch special effect continues.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the pre-reading special effect, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the stop effect for notifying the loss after the execution time of the loss variation effect has elapsed. When executed, the prefetch special effect is terminated as if the end condition of the prefetch special effect was satisfied. On the other hand, in the first pachinko machine 1, the first special figure reservation number is subtracted to “0” to start the jackpot variation effect, and the prefetch special effect continues.

  When a predetermined time elapses in this state, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach effect is started and the prefetch special effect is continued. Further, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the customer waiting state in which the variation effect and the jackpot effect are not executed is performed, and the frame display 15 performs the light emission during standby corresponding to the customer waiting state.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 34A, in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, the special reach effect is started and the pre-reading special effect is continued. Further, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the light emission during standby is continuously executed by the frame display 15.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special reach effect, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, the stop effect for notifying the jackpot is executed after the execution time of the jackpot variation effect has elapsed. At the same time, pre-reading special effects continue. Further, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is won at the first start opening 45, the first special figure hold number becomes “1”, and immediately after that, the first special figure hold number is subtracted to “0”. Then, the loss variation effect is started and the variation effect light emission corresponding to the loss variation effect is started on the frame display 15.

  Furthermore, when the execution time of the stop effect for notifying the jackpot has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot game and the jackpot effect are started, and the prefetch special effect is ended. The jackpot light emission corresponding to the jackpot effect is started on the frame display 15. Further, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the stop effect for notifying the loss is executed after the execution time of the loss change effect has elapsed, and the light emission at the stop corresponding to the stop effect is executed on the frame display 15. .

  Thus, specific information (information that triggers an external device to input to the pachinko gaming machine 1) such as special figure scheduled stop symbol information and special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern information is output from the predetermined pachinko gaming machine 1 As a result, when the start information of the prefetch special effect is simultaneously input to a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 (1st to 8th), the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 (1st to 8th) are prefetched all at once. A special performance will be executed. Therefore, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 can suggest (notice) that a jackpot game is executed in any one of the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1, and the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed It becomes possible to improve effectively.

  The start information of the pre-reading special effect may be input only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has output the specific information. Even in this case, the pre-reading special effect is executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has output the specific information. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game is executed in a manner different from the case where there is no input from the external device.

<Examples of special effects during the fluctuation of pachinko machines>
Using FIG. 35, an example of an effect in the case where start information of a changing special effect is simultaneously input to a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 and the changing special effect is executed all at once will be described.
In addition, about the installation condition of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the information input device, it is the same as the example of the pre-reading special effect of the pachinko gaming machine described above, and the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, a stop effect for notifying the losing is executed in a state where the first special figure holding number is “3”. Light emission at stop corresponding to the stop effect is executed. In addition, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the loss variation display is executed in a state where the first special figure holding number is “1”, and the frame display 15 performs the variation effect light emission corresponding to the loss variation effect. Has been. At this time, the information input device provided corresponding to each of the input reception devices 87 of the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines 1 is not in operation.

  After that, when the big hit variation effect is started in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure stop symbol information and the special figure showing that the big hit game is executed from the external output terminal board 86 of the first pachinko gaming machine 1. The fluctuation pattern information, that is, specific information that triggers an input from the external device to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the drive signal of the information input device provided corresponding to each of the input receiving devices 87 of the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines 1 from the external device that has received the specific information. The second actuator of the information input device is actuated by the output, and the second input reception switch 87b of the input reception device 87 is pressed and turned ON (starting information of the special special effect during the change is input). The changing special effects are started in each of the pachinko machines 1 in the series, and the character information “CHANCE!” Is displayed on the frame display 15. At this time, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the stop effect for notifying the loss is executed after the execution time of the loss change effect has elapsed.

  When a predetermined time (10 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the start of the special effect during change, the reach effect is started in the first pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. The production continues. Further, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the loss variation effect is executed, and the prefetch special effect is ended assuming that the end condition of the changing special effect is satisfied. Thereafter, when the jackpot game is started with the first pachinko gaming machine 1, the changing special effect is ended as if the end condition of the changing special effect is satisfied.

  As described above, the result of output of specific information (information that triggers an external device to input to the pachinko gaming machine 1) such as special figure stop symbol information and special figure fluctuation pattern information from the predetermined pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. When the start information of special effects during the change is input to a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 (1st to 8th) at the same time, the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 (1st to 8th) are changing at the same time. A special performance will be executed. Therefore, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 can suggest (notice) that a jackpot game is executed in any one of the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1, and the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed It becomes possible to improve effectively.

  Moreover, the start information of the changing special effect may be input only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has output the specific information. Even in this case, the changing special effect is being output by the pachinko machine 1 that has output the specific information. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game is executed in a manner different from the case where there is no input from the external device.

<Example of special error production for pachinko machines>
Using FIG. 36, an effect example in the case where error special effect start information is simultaneously input to a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 and the error special effect is executed all at once will be described.
In addition, about the installation condition of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the information input device, it is the same as the example of the pre-reading special effect of the pachinko gaming machine described above, and the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the first pachinko gaming machine 1, a stop effect for notifying the losing is executed in a state where the first special figure holding number is “3”. Light emission at stop corresponding to the stop effect is executed. In addition, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine 1, the loss variation display is executed in a state where the first special figure holding number is “1”, and the frame display 15 performs the variation effect light emission corresponding to the loss variation effect. Has been. At this time, the information input device provided corresponding to each of the input reception devices 87 of the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines 1 is not in operation.

  When the occurrence of a magnetic error is detected after the first pachinko gaming machine 1 starts the loss variation effect, a magnetic error notification indicating that a magnetic error has occurred in the first pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. At the same time, error occurrence information indicating that a magnetic error has occurred from the external output terminal board 86, that is, specific information that triggers an input from the external device to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), driving signals for the information input devices corresponding to the input receiving devices 87 of the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines 1 are output from the external device that has received the specific information. As a result, the third actuator of the information input device is operated, and the third input reception switch 87c of the input reception device 87 is pressed and turned ON (the start information of the error special effect is input), and the first to eighth pachinko games An error special effect is started on each of the machines 1, and the character information “error occurrence” (the error type is not displayed) is displayed on the frame display 15.

  When a predetermined time (in this case, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the error special effect, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the end conditions for the error special effect are established in the first to eighth pachinko machines 1 As a result, the special error production ends. In the first pachinko gaming machine 1, since the magnetic error notification termination condition has not yet been established, the magnetic error notification continues.

  Thus, as a result of outputting specific information (information that triggers an external device to input to the pachinko gaming machine 1) such as magnetic error information and radio wave error information from a predetermined pachinko gaming machine 1, When the error special effect start information is simultaneously input to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (1st to 8th), the error special effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 (1st to 8th). It will be. Therefore, the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 can suggest (notify) that there is a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an error has occurred, and it is possible to make an employee of the game hall know that an error has occurred.

  Moreover, the error special effect start information may be input only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has output the specific information. Even in this case, the error special effect is executed on the pachinko machine 1 that has output the specific information. Therefore, it is possible to transmit to the game hall employee that an error has occurred in a manner different from the case where there is no input from the external device.

  Further, the pre-reading special effect, the changing special effect, and the error special effect are executed by the frame indicator 15 and the speaker 12, but at least one special kind of special effect such as the pre-reading special effect, the changing special effect, and the error special effect is provided. The presentation may be executed only by the frame display 15 without being executed by the speaker 12, or the frame display 15, the speaker 12, and the image display device (the first image display device 71 and / or the second image display). May be executed by the device 72), or may be executed by the speaker 12 and the image display device (the first image display device 71 and / or the second image display device 72) without being executed by the frame display 15. May be.

<Basic configuration of the spinning machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, which is a perspective view of the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the basic configuration of the rotating type gaming machine will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 37, a slot machine 501 which is a spinning-reel game machine has an opening side of a housing 502 in which a front door 505 constituting a so-called front mask that faces the player side is a substantially rectangular box. On the other hand, it is attached by a hinge mechanism so that it can be opened and closed with the left end side as a pivot. The front door 505 is roughly divided into an upper panel portion 503, side panel portions 506a and 506b, a middle panel portion 508, an operation panel portion 518, and a lower panel portion 515, which are hard and designed to enhance visual effects as decorative panels. It is integrally formed of plastic.

  At the upper part of the housing 502, that is, at a position where the player cannot operate, the outside of the slot machine 501 (a hall computer provided in the office of the game hall, an island computer provided on the game island, and above the slot machine 501 An input receiving device 523 for receiving input from a calling lamp provided, an external device such as a lending device provided in the slot machine 501) is provided. In the input receiving device 523, a first input receiving switch 523a, a second input receiving switch 523b, and a third input receiving switch 523c for receiving a pressing operation are arranged side by side, and the respective input receiving switches 523a to 523c. Thus, an input from the outside of the slot machine 501 is accepted. Note that the input reception device 523 may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate such as the back surface or the bottom surface of the housing 502, or the input reception device 523 is difficult for the player such as the back side of the bottom surface of the tray unit 504 to operate. You may provide in a position.

  Inside the housing 502, a main control board (not shown) on which a main control unit 610 (described later) for overall control of the overall operation of the slot machine 501 is formed, and a left cylinder which is three cylindrical rotating reels. A reel unit 510 including a reel 510a, a middle reel 510b, and a right reel 510c, and a power supply device (not shown) for supplying power to each part of the slot machine 501 are provided. Further, as members constituting the storage and payout means 950 (described later), a hopper device having a medal discharge slit for paying out medals in accordance with winning of a game (design variation display), and medals overflowing from the hopper device are stored. An auxiliary storage unit and the like are provided.

  Here, the reel unit 510 controls the rotation and rotation stop of each of the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c by a reel substrate (not shown) that receives a rotation drive start control signal, a rotation drive stop control signal, and the like from the main control unit 610. It has come to be. Further, the reel unit 510 is placed so as to be freely pulled out and pushed back with respect to a pedestal (not shown) attached to the inside of the housing 502. The reels 510a, 510b, and 510c are arranged side by side with their respective peripheral surfaces facing one direction (player side).

  Further, a power supply device board (not shown) corresponding to a so-called switchboard is provided on, for example, a side surface of the power supply device provided in the housing 502. The power supply board is formed with a power distribution circuit that distributes various power supply voltages generated by the power supply apparatus to various places such as the reel unit 510 and the hopper device constituting the storage / dispensing means 950. A system power supply necessary for the operation of 501 is supplied.

  The front door 505 is locked by a locking device (not shown) having a key hole 522 provided in the operation panel unit 518 at a position where the opening of the housing 502 is closed, and the hall staff or the like is a main control unit 610 (described later). When performing maintenance work including confirmation of the state of each electronic element etc. on the main control board formed on the head, and a ball management work accompanying setting value change, etc., a dedicated key is inserted into the key hole 522 of the front door 505. When the lock is released, the front door 505 is opened.

The upper panel 503 of the front door 505 is provided with an LED display 520 in which a large number of LEDs are arranged in a matrix. The LED display 520 can display information relating to the game by dot matrix display, and is used for performing a visual effect by controlling the lighting mode.
On the side panel portions 506a and 506b of the front door 505, effect lamps 507a and 507b incorporating high-intensity light emitting diodes are arranged. These effect lamps 507a and 507b are lit or blinked at the time of a bonus winning or a bonus game, and perform an effect appealing to the player's vision.

  A reel unit 510 is provided in the middle panel portion 508 of the front door 505, and a liquid crystal display 509 is provided so as to cover the front surface. The liquid crystal display 509 has a backlight on the back surface of the liquid crystal panel, but the display windows 509a, 509b, and 509c have no member such as a backlight, and are transparent when no image is displayed. Through the liquid crystal panel, the symbols drawn on the reels 510a, 510b, 510c of the reel unit 510 can be visually recognized in three stages through the display windows 509a, 509b, 509c.

  The operation panel unit 518 of the front door 505 has a medal insertion unit 511 having an insertion slot for inserting medals used for a game (design change display), a bet switch 512a for betting one medal at a time, and a medal MAX bet switch 512b for betting three pieces at a time, a settlement switch 519 for paying out medals stored as credits to the outside of the slot machine 501, a start switch 513 having an operation knob for instructing game operations, and a reel unit A left reel stop switch 514a, a middle reel stop switch 514b, and a right reel stop switch 514c for stopping the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c of 510 are provided. The operation panel unit 518 is provided with an effect button 521. This effect button can be pressed (valid) in various effects, and the above-described effect is developed by pressing the effect button 521.

  The bet switch 512 a and the MAX bet switch 512 b are push-type operation switches for presenting the number of medals bet on the game of the slot machine 501. When a medal is credited, if the bet switch 512a or the MAX bet switch 512b is operated at the start of the game, one, two, or three of the credited medals are bet.

The start switch 513 is a lever switch for instructing the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c of the reel unit 510 to rotate at the same time. The start switch 513 is turned on when the spherical operation knob provided at the tip is tilted downward. When the hand is released from the operation knob, the spring is automatically returned to the original position and turned off by the urging force of the spring.
The left reel stop switch 514a, the middle reel stop switch 514b, and the right reel stop switch 514c are pressing switches for individually instructing to stop the rotation of the left reel 510a, the middle reel 510b, and the right reel 510c of the reel unit 510. The reels 510a, 510b and 510c are arranged in parallel corresponding to the arrangement of the reels 510a, 510b and 510c.

  Also, on the back of the operation panel unit 518 of the front door 505, a bet switch 512a, a MAX bet switch 512b, a settlement switch 519, a start switch 513, a left reel stop switch 514a, a middle reel stop switch 514b, A central display board (not shown) to which various operation switches such as a reel stop switch 514c are electrically connected is provided, and output signals of these switches are transferred from the central display board to the main control unit 610. It has become.

  The lower panel 515 of the front door 505 is provided with a panel on which, for example, a picture of an appearing character is drawn in order for the player to recognize the model name, motif, etc. of the slot machine 501.

  A tray unit 504 is formed below the lower panel portion 515. The saucer unit 504 has a medal discharge port 516 for discharging medals at the time of winning a prize, payment, etc., speakers 517a and 517b that generate effect sound according to the progress of the game (design variation display), and player-owned And a medal storage tray 504a for storing the medals.

  Then, a control signal (effect) that is provided on the back surface of the upper panel portion 503 of the front door 505 and suggests the start of the effect from the main control unit 610 on a sub-control board (not shown) on which the effect control unit 800 (described later) is formed. (Including commands and the like) is supplied by the effect control unit 800, the display of moving images and the like by the liquid crystal display 509, the effect of display or blinking or lighting of information by the LED display 520, and the effect lamps 507a and 507b. An effect by blinking or lighting by means of an effect, an effect by sound effects from the speakers 517a and 517b, and the like are performed.

  The central display board is provided with a setting switch (not shown) covered with an openable / closable cover (not shown). This setting switch changes a setting value (for example, a setting value divided into six stages from “1” to “6”) when determining the payout rate (medal payout rate) of the slot machine 501 Is operated. Note that, after the setting value change operation is performed, the start switch 513 is operated, whereby the setting value of the slot machine 501 is determined as the changed setting value.

  In addition, on the rear surface of the lower panel portion 515 of the front door 505, a selector (not shown) that sorts and sorts whether the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 511 is a regular medal or a foreign object, and the selector uses this selector. A hopper guide member for guiding the received medal to the hopper device provided in the housing 502, a guide member for guiding the foreign matter distributed by the selector to the medal discharge port 516, and the medal discharge slit of the hopper device. A payout guide member for guiding the medal to the medal discharge port 516 side of the tray unit 504 is provided.

  Note that the selector cannot accept medals (a state in which medal insertion acceptance is prohibited) during rotation of each of the reels 510a, 510b, 510c of the reel unit 510 or when replaying is performed, and the medal insertion unit 511 is disabled. The medals thrown in are distributed to the guide member side. Then, medals distributed to the guide member side are discharged from the medal discharge port 516 side. In addition, the selector can accept medals when the game is on standby (when the reel unit 510 is stopped) (a state in which acceptance of medal insertion is permitted), and accepts medals in conjunction with the detection of medals. To do.

  The slot machine 501 according to the present embodiment enables a game (design variation display) to be started by inserting a predetermined number of medals by operating the MAX bet switch 512b or the like or by inserting medals. Then, when the start switch 513 is pressed, the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c are rotated to start the game, and a lottery is performed. Then, the slot machine 501 plays the role of rotating each reel 510a, 510b, 510c based on the operation timing of each reel stop switch 514a, 514b, 514c corresponding to each reel 510a, 510b, 510c and the result of the winning lottery. Stop to fit the lottery results. The slot machine 501 has a predetermined combination of symbols constituting the winning combination depending on the combination of symbols at the time of stoppage (a line that is awarded when the symbols of the predetermined combination are aligned, hereinafter referred to as a winning line) Note that “winning line” means a line to be determined by the stop symbol determining means 660 described later, and “winning” means that a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination is arranged on the winning line. The winning line is composed of only one reel 510a, 510b, 510c that is connected to the middle of each reel), and when it is stopped and displayed, it becomes a winning or the like, and a predetermined profit such as paying out a predetermined number of medals is played. Grant to the person. This completes one game.

<Control structure of the spinning machine>
As shown in FIG. 38, a control device 600 for controlling the overall operation of the slot machine 501 is formed inside the slot machine 501. The control device 600 receives a signal from the main control unit 610 that controls the game state by advancing the game, and an effect state for performing an effect of notifying the player of information related to the game content. And an effect control unit 800 (so-called sub-control unit).

  The main control unit 610 controls the operation of the reel unit 510 and the storage / dispensing means 950 while performing the lottery. The effect control unit 800 receives signals from the main control unit 610 and the input receiving device 523, and operates the LED display 520, the effect lamps 507 (7a, 7b), the liquid crystal display 509, and the speakers 517 (517a, 517b). To control. Note that only one-way communication from the former to the latter is performed between the main control unit 610 and the effect control means 810. On the output side of the effect control unit 800, each part of an LED display 520, an effect lamp 507 (7a, 7b), a liquid crystal display 509, and a speaker 517 (517a, 517b) as the notification means 70 is connected. .

  The control device 600 is configured by a microcomputer including a CPU, ROM, RAM, and I / O port (not shown). The CPU has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, and executes various programs by executing a program stored in the ROM. The ROM stores fixed data such as a program executed by the CPU and various tables, and the RAM stores a temporary storage area when the CPU executes the program, for example, the state of the slot machine 501. It is used as a storage area and a storage area for storing the lottery result of the role lottery.

<Functional configuration of control device>
The main control unit 610 includes a game control unit 620, a role lottery unit 630, a rotation control unit 640, a stop control unit 650, a stop symbol determination unit 660, a privilege grant unit 670, a freeze control unit 680, an AT control unit 690, and an error determination unit. 700, bet number setting means 710, credit control means 720, payout control means 730, set value setting means 740, information output means 750, and main side effect drive means 760 (effect device drive means 900). Details of each means will be described later.
With the above configuration, the main control unit 610 performs lottery drawing, controls the rotation and stop of each reel 510a, 510b, 510c, and performs stop symbol determination when all the reels 510a, 510b, 510c stop. It will function as a means for progressing the game.

In addition, the effect control unit 800 includes an effect control unit 810, an extra notification unit 820, an AT notification unit 830, a sub-side effect drive unit 840 (effect device driving unit 900), a special effect control unit 910 (preliminary special effect execution unit 920, Each means of a special effect executing means 930 during fluctuation and an error special effect executing means 940) is included. Details of each means will be described later.
With the above configuration, the effect control unit 800 functions as a means for determining the presence / absence and mode of the effect and controlling the effect according to the state of the game and the effect according to the input from the outside.
The game control means 620 is for controlling the game and for executing the main game. Hereinafter, the game according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Description of the game>
When the specified number (3) of bets is set, a pay line is set. In the slot machine 501 according to the present embodiment, 3 is set as the specified number. As a method for setting the bet number, there are a method for inserting a medal from the medal insertion unit 511 and a method for setting a credit medal as a bet number by operating the bet switch 512a or the MAX bet switch 512b. If the start switch 513 is operated on the condition that the specified number (three) of bets has been set, whether the number of bets has been won by the combination lottery means 630. Alternatively, a lottery (role lottery) is performed. Almost simultaneously with the role lottery, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4.1 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels 510a, 510b, 510c in the previous game. When a predetermined time elapses, the rotation of all three reels 510a, 510b, 510c starts.

  In the present embodiment, if a role is roughly classified, a small role 1 to 3 (a role accompanied by paying out medals) and a re-playing role (a role that can start the next game without using a medal owned by the player). (Replay)), special combinations 1 to 3 (combinations with game state transition (big bonus, regular bonus, challenge bonus)) are provided. In addition, a special role that can be said to be a role in a broad sense (a symbol (RT symbol) accompanying a shift to a special game) is provided. Note that the small role 1 and the special roles 1 to 3 can be elected redundantly.

Then, after the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c start to rotate, a predetermined condition (in this embodiment, a process of accelerating the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c is executed, and after reaching a certain speed, When the sensor detects that the rotation position of each reel 510a, 510b, 510c is the reference position), the reel stop switches 514a, 514b, 514c can be operated (stop operation possible state). .
Thereafter, when one of the three reel stop switches 514a, 514b, 514c is operated, the rotation of the reels 510a, 510b, 510c corresponding to the reel stop switches 514a, 514b, 514c is stopped. When all the three reel stop switches 514a, 514b, and 514c have been operated, the rotation of all three reels 510a, 510b, and 510c is stopped.

At this time, when a predetermined symbol combination is arranged on the winning line, processing corresponding to the symbol combination is performed. The slot machine 501 according to the present embodiment is formed such that a profit is given to the player when a predetermined symbol combination is arranged on the winning line. For example, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the small combination are arranged on the winning line, the number of medals corresponding to the small combination is awarded to the player.
In addition, when a small role and a special role are won in duplicate, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role can be stopped on the winning line so that the small role has priority over the special role. Yes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are provided a normal game that is normally performed, and a special game and a special game in which the profit given to the player can be greater than that of the normal game. As special games, so-called bonus games (BB game, RB game) are provided. As special games, a so-called assist time (AT) game, a replay time (RT) game, and a so-called assist replay time (ART) game in which an AT game and an RT game are combined are provided. Note that bonus games, AT games, RT games, ART games, and the like may be collectively referred to as advantageous states.

The assist time (AT) game assists to establish a winning combination by notifying the stop operation order of each reel stop switch 514a, 514b, 514c, winning symbol, and the like.
In the replay time (RT) game, the probability of winning the replay is set higher (or lower) than the game in the normal gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state in which a normal game is being executed, a special game state in which a bonus game is being executed, and a special game state in which a special game is being executed. It has been.
The bonus game is a game that is started from the next game of the complete game when the bonus combination combination which is a special combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus transition combination is arranged on the winning line. In addition, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus transition combination is not arranged on the winning line in the game at the time of winning, the bonus combination combination until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus transition combination is arranged on the winning line after the next game. The winning combination is valid, but the other combinations are invalid after the next game if there is no symbol combination corresponding to the combination on the winning line in the winning game. Bonus games are set so that the probability of winning a small role is higher than games that have not shifted to bonus games. Therefore, games that are likely to give a player greater profits than normal games. It is. The bonus game ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the bonus game exceeds a preset number.

The RT game as a special game has an RT transition pattern (which can be won when winning the RT transition combination, or can be derived when a predetermined small role is missed) on the winning line. This is a game that starts from the next game of the complete game. The RT game continues, for example, from the start until 200 games have been consumed.
The AT game as a special game is given unconditionally from the start of the RT game until the game is digested 50 times, and every time an extra lottery performed when a freeze state occurs during the RT game is won. AT games for 20 or 20 games are added. An ART game is controlled by an AT game as well as an RT game.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-gamer is arranged on the winning line, the medals will not be paid out in the next game, but in the next game, the number of bets is automatically set without using the player-owned medals. be able to.

  The role lottery means 630 is a means provided in the main control unit 610, and is used for performing a lottery (role lottery) of winning or losing a plurality of roles in response to an operation of the start switch 513. . The combination lottery means 630 includes lottery data for determining whether or not a combination is won, and is stored in the ROM of the main control unit 610. The role lottery means 630 compares predetermined lottery data with random numbers extracted from random numbers generated by predetermined random number generation means (random number generation circuit) having a loop counter that repeatedly counts integer values within a predetermined range. Then, it is determined whether or not it is won. The process by the combination lottery means 630 is performed in an internal lottery process described later.

The rotation control means 640 is a means provided in the main control unit 610, and is for starting the rotation of each of the reels 510a, 510b, 510c. The rotation control means 640 starts and accelerates the rotation of each reel 510a, 510b, 510c on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous game (revolution start of each reel 510a, 510b, 510c). When a predetermined sensor detects that the rotational position of each reel 510a, 510b, 510c is the reference position after reaching a certain speed, the operation of each reel stop switch 514a, 514b, 514c is validated.
Note that the processing by the rotation control unit 640 is performed in a reel rotation processing described later.

  The stop control means 650 is a means provided in the main control unit 610, and is for stopping the rotation of each reel 510a, 510b, 510c. Based on the lottery result of the winning lottery means 630 and the rotation positions of the corresponding reels 510a, 510b, 510c when the reel stop switches 514a, 514b, 514c are operated, the stop control means 650 The rotation of 510b and 510c is stopped. Note that the processing by the stop control means 650 is performed in a reel stop processing described later.

  The stop symbol determination means 660 is a means included in the main control unit 610, and stores symbol combinations on the winning line when all the reels 510a, 510b, 510c are stopped, and determines a winning or the like. is there. Note that the processing by the stop symbol determination means 660 is performed in determination processing described later.

The privilege granting unit 670 is a unit included in the main control unit 610, and performs predetermined processing such as medal payout based on the determination result of the stop symbol determination unit 660. As a result of the determination by the stop symbol determination unit 660, the privilege granting unit 670 pays out medals when it is determined that the small role is winning.
Further, when the re-game player has won a prize as a result of the determination by the stop symbol determination unit 660, the privilege grant unit 670 stores that fact in the RAM of the main control unit 610. Thereby, the main control unit 610 enables the game in the next game without using the medal owned by the player.

Further, when the special symbol is won or the RT symbol is derived as a result of the determination by the stop symbol determining unit 660, the privilege granting unit 670 stores that fact in the RAM of the main control unit 610. As a result, the main control unit 610 controls from the next game to a bonus as a special game or RT as a special game.
Note that the processing by the privilege granting means 670 is performed in a payout process described later.

  The freeze control means 680 is capable of executing a freeze state in which the game is temporarily suspended by the operation of the start switch 513 and the game cannot proceed. There are two types of freeze states: a short for which the game cannot be advanced and a long for a relatively short time. Note that the process by the freeze control means 680 is performed in a freeze effect process described later.

  The AT control means 690 is a means provided in the main control unit 610, which grants 50 AT games at the start of the RT game, and can perform an AT addition lottery while it is in a frozen state. If you win, the number of AT games will be added. The AT control means 690 controls the AT until the number of initially added AT games and the number of added games are consumed. The process by the AT control means 690 is performed in a freeze effect process described later or in a payout process.

  The error determination unit 700 is a unit that detects various errors that occur in the slot machine 501. The errors determined by the error determination means 700 may include an error that is unavoidable due to the mechanism of the slot machine 501 such as malfunction of each reel 510a, 510b, 510c, clogged medals, etc. There is an error that occurs when a certain event is detected. Also, the opening of the front door 505, which may be a legitimate operation by an amusement hall employee but may be fraudulent, is also determined as an error.

  The credit control means 720 is a means for controlling the increase / decrease of credits stored as internal data for medals inserted by the player from the medal insertion section 511 and medals paid out by small role winning beyond the setting of the betting number. It is a period from the end of one game to the start of the next game (operation of the start switch 513 after setting the bet number) that a medal can be inserted from the medal insertion unit 511 and credits can be added. The credit control means 720 also instructs the payout control means 730 to pay out medals corresponding to the number of stored credits when the settlement switch 519 is operated.

  The payout control means 730 controls the hopper device and pays out medals given to the player by the small role winning, and pays out medals according to the credits adjusted by operating the checkout switch 519. The process by the payout control means 730 is performed in a payout process described later.

  The setting value setting means 740 is a means for setting a setting value by operating the setting switch and the start switch 513 and storing it in the RAM in the setting change mode. Note that the processing by the set value setting means 740 is performed in a startup process described later.

  The information output means 750 sends game information (error information, payout information, internal winning information, game status information, winning information), etc. generated in accordance with the progress of the game via an output terminal of an external output terminal board (not shown). To the outside of the slot machine 501 (a hall computer, an island computer, a call lamp, a lending device, etc.). The processing by the information output means 750 is performed in a game information output setting process described later.

  The effect device driving means 900 is for driving the effect devices such as the reels 510a, 510b, 510c and the display means 84. The effect device driving means 900 includes a main effect driving means 760 provided on the main control unit 610 side, and a sub-side effect driving means 840 provided on the effect control unit 800 side.

The effect control unit 800 is for executing an effect when it is determined to execute a predetermined effect.
The effect control means 810 performs a predetermined effect according to the command from the main control unit 610 and the game situation. The effect processing by the effect control means 810 is performed in an effect control process described later.

The additional notification means 820 controls the liquid crystal display 509 or the LED display 520 to display the number of extra games such as “+ 10G!” And “+ 20G!” On the liquid crystal display 509 or the LED display 520. . In addition, the notification of the number of added games by the additional notification means 820 is performed in an effect control process described later.
The AT notification means 830 notifies the stop operation order of each reel stop switch 514a, 514b, 514c, the winning symbol, etc. when the small role to be notified in the AT game is won.
In addition, the notification of the winning symbol or the like by the AT notification means 830 is performed in an effect control process described later.

The sub-side effect drive means 840 as the effect device drive means 900 executes a predetermined effect by the LED display 520, the effect lamps 507 (7a, 7b), the liquid crystal display 509, and the speakers 517 (517a, 517b). .
The sub-side effect driving means 840 outputs data defining the turning on / off of the LED to the LED display 520 and the LED driving circuit (not shown) for driving the effect lamps 507 (7a, 7b). Liquid crystal control for driving the liquid crystal display 509 or outputting data for defining sound output to a sound output circuit (not shown) for outputting sound from the speaker 517 (517a, 517b). Data defining video data to be output to a substrate (not shown) is output.

The special effect control means 910 performs control for executing special effects on various effect devices (the frame display 15, the speaker 12, etc.) based on the input from the outside of the slot machine 501 received by the input receiving device 523. .
Prior special effect executing means 920 receives a first input (pressing operation of first input receiving switch 523a) from the outside of slot machine 501 and before a predetermined period (several games) in which the AT game is executed. Each of the effect devices is caused to execute a pre-special effect that suggests (notifies) that the AT game may be executed.

The changing special effect execution means 930 receives the second input (pressing operation of the second input acceptance switch 523b) from the outside of the slot machine 501 and, based on the reception of the special combination (big bonus combination, regular bonus combination, challenge) During the execution of a game in which a bonus combination is won, various special effects devices are executed that suggest (notify) that there is a possibility that a special combination may be won (bonus game is executed).
The error special effect execution means 940 receives a third input from the outside of the slot machine 501 (pressing operation of the third input acceptance switch 523c), and a predetermined error is generated in the slot machine 501 over a predetermined period. Various effect devices (in particular, the LED display 520) are caused to execute an error special effect informing that it has occurred.

  On the surface of the left reel 510a, middle reel 510b, and right reel 510c, symbols corresponding to red 7, blue 7, BE (bell), WM (watermelon), RP (replay), and CH (cherry) are described. ing. On the surface of each of the reels 510a, 510b, 510c, there are provided places where up to 21 symbols can be written. A frame number consisting of a numerical value from 0 to 20 is assigned to a position where each symbol can be described.

  A game in the slot machine 501 is performed by repeating the game, but a special start-up process is executed particularly when the power is turned on.

<Control device startup processing>
Based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 39, the starting process which the control apparatus 600 performs at the time of starting of a power supply is demonstrated.
First, in step S101, when a setting value setting instruction operation is performed by the main control unit 610, it is determined whether or not an instruction to shift to the setting change mode is issued. If it is not instructed to shift to the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S101. If it is instructed to shift to the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S102, the main control unit 610 calculates the parity of the RAM.
In step S103, the main control unit 610 determines whether the RAM parity calculated in step S102 is the same as the RAM parity calculated in the previous power-off and stored in the RAM parity area. . If the RAM parity matches, it is determined that backup data exists, and the information stored in the RAM (that is, information before power-off) is used as it is to restore the state before power-off and the game Start processing.

If the RAM parities do not match, the process proceeds to step S104.
In step S104, the main control unit 610 determines that there is no backup data, sets the RAM information to the initial state (default state), and starts the game process.

In step S105, the process proceeds to the process of the set value setting unit 740. The set value setting unit 740 transmits a set value change command indicating the start of the setting change mode to the effect control unit 800.
In step S106, the setting value setting unit 740 determines whether or not the setting switch is operated. If the setting switch has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S108, and if the setting switch has been operated, the process proceeds to step S107.
In step S107, the set value setting means 740 moves the process to step S108 using a value obtained by adding 1 to the set value currently set as a new set value.

In step S108, the set value setting unit 740 determines whether or not the current set value indicates a settable range (1 to 6). If a settable range is indicated as the set value range, the process proceeds to step S110, and if the settable range is not indicated (when the set value is 7 by addition in step S107, etc.) ), The process proceeds to step S109.
In step S109, the set value setting unit 740 sets the current set value to 1 which is a default value, and moves the process to step S110.

In step S110, it is determined whether or not the start switch 513 has been operated. If the start switch 513 is not operated, the process proceeds to step S106. When the start switch 513 is operated, the current set value is confirmed as a set value to be applied to subsequent games, and the process proceeds to step S111.
In step S111, the set value setting means 740 transmits a set value confirmation command to the effect control unit 800 indicating that the setting change mode has ended and the set value has been confirmed. Thereafter, the game processing is started based on the newly set value.

<One game process of control device>
Based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 40, the 1-game process which the control apparatus 600 performs for every game is demonstrated.

  First, in step S10, the main control unit 610 performs initial setting. The main control unit 610 executes initial settings for preparing for the game start. Here, the initial setting for preparing for the game start includes a process of checking a predetermined error, a process of clearing an unused area and an unused stack area of the RAM, and the like.

  Next, in step S20, the BET process is performed by the main control unit 610. The main control unit 610 sets the number of bets based on the number of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 511, or when there are medals already stored, by pressing the MAX bet switch 512b (or the bet switch 512a). . When the prescribed bet number (3) is set, the process proceeds to an internal lottery process in step S30.

  Next, in step S30, an internal lottery process is performed by the combination lottery means 630. The role lottery means 630 starts the game by operating the start switch 513 in the operation enabled state, and determines whether or not any winning combination is set as a result of the internal lottery. In this internal lottery process, all reels 510a, 510b, 510c that start to rotate in the next step S40 are in a stopped state (a stop state is caused by a player's stop operation, or automatically after a predetermined time elapses). This is executed in order to determine whether any winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game in a stage before the stop control is performed. In other words, only when the lottery result corresponds to any winning combination, the corresponding winning combination is allowed. Details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

  Next, in step S40, the freeze control means 680 performs a freeze effect process. The freeze control means 680 disables the progress of the game for a certain period when a predetermined condition is satisfied. However, the operation of the start switch 513 is not invalidated while the progress of the game is disabled in the freeze effect process, and the re-lottery process described in detail later can be performed. In the freeze effect process, an extra lottery can also be performed. Details of this freeze effect processing will be described later.

  Next, in step S50, the rotation control means 640 performs reel rotation processing. The rotation control means 640 starts rotation of all the reels 510a, 510b, 510c on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 510a, 510b, 510c started in the previous game. In this reel rotation processing, the left reel stop switch 514a, the middle reel stop switch, on the condition that the reference position is detected after reaching the predetermined rotation speed after the rotation of all the reels 510a, 510b, 510c is started. 514b, the operation of pressing the right reel stop switch 514c is validated, an operation valid lamp (not shown) notifying that each reel stop switch 514a, 514b, 514c is activated is turned on, and the next reel rotation process is executed. The timer count until it is started. The operation effective lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop switches 514a, 514b, and 514c. The re-lottery process, which will be described in detail later, can be performed until the valid operation of pressing the left reel stop switch 514a, middle reel stop switch 514b, and right reel stop switch 514c becomes valid. Details of the reel rotation process will be described later.

  In step S60, the stop control unit 650 performs a reel stop process. When the player presses down the left reel stop switch 514a, the middle reel stop switch 514b, and the right reel stop switch 514c, the stop control means 650 turns off the operation valid lamps in the order in which they are received, and the corresponding reel 510a, The rotation of 510b and 510c is stopped. The stop control means 650 sends a stop command indicating the stopped symbols to the effect control unit 800 each time the rotation of the reels 510a, 510b, 510c stops. Details of the reel stop process will be described later.

  In step S70, the stop symbol determination means 660 performs determination processing. When the stop symbol determining means 660 determines that the rotation of all the reels 510a, 510b, 510c is stopped in the above step S60, the display content displayed on the active line (the symbol combination mode) and the above A determination process is performed in which a winning combination is determined by checking what is permitted as a result of the internal lottery determined in step S30. The stop symbol determination means 660 transmits a winning determination command indicating the determination result to the effect control unit 800.

  Next, in step S80, a payout process is performed by the privilege grant means 670. The privilege granting means 670 executes a medal payout process based on the content of the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S70. When the winning combination is a special combination or replay, various game benefits such as a change of game state and replay are executed. In other words, the payout process includes a process of granting various game benefits such as a game state change and replay (hereinafter referred to as “game privilege grant process”). Further, at the end of the payout process, a state command indicating a gaming state applied in the next game is transmitted to the effect control unit 800. Details of the payout process will be described later.

<Internal lottery process of control device>
Based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 41, the internal lottery process in step S30 will be described.
In step S <b> 301, the combination lottery unit 630 executes an operation input validation process for the start switch 513. Here, the operation input of the start switch 513 is validated, and the operation input is waited until the operation input of the start switch 513 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S302.

  In the next step S302, the winning lottery means 630 determines whether or not an operation input of the start switch 513 has been accepted. When an operation input of the start switch 513 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S303. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation input of the start switch 513 is not accepted, the role lottery unit 630 repeats the process of step S302.

Next, in step S303, the role lottery means 630 executes an operation input invalidation process for the start switch 513.
Further, in step S304, the combination lottery means 630 extracts a random number in response to an operation input of the start switch 513. After the random number is extracted here, the process proceeds to the next step S305.
Note that the random number is extracted at this time immediately after the start switch 513 is input or after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds). Can be set.

  In step S305, the winning lottery means 630 determines which winning combination corresponds to the winning combination from the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number value) as flag processing (matching of the random number value). In this determination, the extracted random number value is collated in the hit value determination table. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds to (or matches or matches) a predetermined winning random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the flag corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is set to ON (= 1). The flag corresponding to the winning combination turned ON at this time is referred to as the winning combination winning flag. For example, if the winning combination is watermelon, the watermelon winning flag is turned ON.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table serving as a determination criterion when collating the extracted random number value in the game, the winning value determination table in the game is determined with reference to the gaming state. . That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag that is ON in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S305 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and the loss flag is turned ON. Here, the winning flag or the lost flag (collectively referred to as the establishment flag) means that the winning symbol corresponding to the establishment flag can be aligned only when the corresponding establishment flag is ON. It will be. Therefore, when the established flag corresponds to the lost flag, none of the winning symbols can be aligned. In step S304 and step S305, since random number lottery is performed inside the slot machine 501, the processing in these step S304 and step S305 is referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. Hereinafter, the establishment flag including the loss flag is referred to as an internal lottery flag as necessary.

In step S306, the winning lottery means 630 transmits a command (winning command) related to the winning combination winning flag to the effect control unit 800.
Note that the internal lottery flag that is turned on when the special combination (BB, RB, CB) is won is carried over (it remains ON) until the special combination wins.

<Freeze effect processing of control device>
Based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 42, the freeze effect process in step S40 will be described.
In step S401, the freeze control means 680 determines whether or not the current game is an RT game. If it is an RT game, the process proceeds to step S402. If it is not an RT game, the freeze effect process is terminated.

  In step S402, the freeze control means 680 extracts a freeze determination random number for determining whether or not to control the freeze state. The freeze determination random number is a random number different from the random number for the winning lottery means 630 to determine the winning combination. However, a hardware random number generated by the random number generation circuit can also be a counter whose numerical value is updated by software. The software random number used may be used.

In step S403, the freeze control means 680 determines whether or not the value of the extracted freeze determination random number indicates a predetermined short winning value. If the short winning value is indicated, the process proceeds to step S404. If the short winning value is not indicated, the process proceeds to step S405.
In step S404, the freeze control means 680 sets an initial value (short) for which the time for disabling the progress of the game in the freeze state is a relatively short time to a freeze timer that measures time with a down counter. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S405, the freeze control means 680 determines whether or not the value of the extracted freeze determination random number indicates a predetermined long winning value. If the winning value is indicated, the process proceeds to step S406. If the winning value is not indicated, the freeze effect process is terminated.
In step S406, the freeze control means 680 sets an initial value (long) in which the time for disabling the progress of the game in the freeze state is a relatively long time in the freeze timer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S407, the freeze control means 680 starts a freeze timer for measuring the time during which the progress of the game is disabled in the freeze state for the time set in step S404 or S406.
In step S408, the freeze control means 680 disables the progress of the game until the freeze timer expires. While the progress of the game is disabled, the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c do not start rotating even if a wait timer (described later) is up, and the reel stop switches 514a, 514b, and 514c are also operated. Not valid.
In step S409, freeze control means 680 transmits a freeze command to effect control unit 800.

  In step S410, the process proceeds to the AT control unit 690, and the AT control unit 690 extracts an addition determination random number for determining whether or not to add the number of AT games. Note that the additional determination random number is a random number different from the random number for the winning lottery means 630 to determine the winning combination. However, a hardware random number generated by the random number generation circuit can also be updated with a counter whose numerical value is updated by software. The software random number used may be used.

In step S411, the AT control means 690 determines whether or not the extracted extra determined random number value indicates the extra winning value of 10 games. If the winning value for 10 games is indicated, the process proceeds to step S412. If the winning value for 10 games is not indicated, the process proceeds to step S413.
In step S412, the AT control means 690 adds the number of AT games by 10 games (add 10 if the value of the AT counter is 1 or more, add 11 if the value of the AT counter is 0), and perform step S415. Proceed to processing.

In step S413, the AT control unit 690 determines whether or not the value of the extracted additional determination random number indicates the additional winning value of 10 games. If an additional winning value is indicated for 20 games, the process proceeds to step S414. If no winning value is indicated, the process proceeds to step S416.
In step S414, the AT control means 690 adds the number of AT games by 20 games (adds 20 if the value of the AT counter is 1 or more, adds 21 if the value of the AT counter is 0), and performs step S415. Proceed to processing.

  In step S415, the AT control unit 690 transmits an addition command that can specify the added number of AT games to the effect control unit 800.

  In step S416, the process proceeds to the freeze control unit 680 again, and the freeze control unit 680 determines whether or not the freeze timer started in step S407 has expired. If the freeze timer is up, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S417. If the freeze timer has not expired, the process returns to step S416 and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In step S417, the freeze control means 680 cancels the state where the progress of the game controlled in step S408 is disabled, and enables the progress of the game.

<Reel rotation processing of control device>
Based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 43, the reel rotation processing in step S50 will be described.
In step S501, the rotation control means 640 times up the wait timer (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed) that was started in the previous start process (specifically, the game that was played one time before the game). It is determined whether or not. The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S502. If the wait timer has not expired, the process of step S501 is repeated.

In step S502, the rotation control means 640 starts rotation of all the reels 510a, 510b, 510c.
In step S503, the rotation control means 640 transmits a reel rotation command to the effect control unit 800.
In step S504, the rotation control unit 640 resets the wait timer and starts the wait timer until the next game.

  In step S505, the rotation control unit 640 determines whether or not the reference position has been detected after the rotation speeds of all the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c have become constant. If the reference position is detected after the rotation speeds of all the reels 510a, 510b, 510c become constant, the process proceeds to step S510. If there is one of the reels 510a, 510b, 510c whose rotation speed is not constant, or if there is a reel whose rotation speed is constant but the reference position is not detected, step S505. Repeat the process.

In step S506, the rotation control means 640 validates the pressing operation of each reel stop switch 514a, 514b, 514c, and lights each operation valid lamp. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of each reel stop switch 514a, 514b, 514c has become effective.
In the slot machine 501, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain its rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation by the player (pressing operation of the reel stop switches 514a, 514b, and 514c) is accepted. .

  In step S507, rotation control means 640 transmits a stop validation command to effect control unit 800.

<Reel stop processing of control device>
Based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 44, the reel stop process in step S60 will be described.
In step S601, the stop control unit 650 determines whether or not a pressing operation of the left reel stop switch 514a by the player is accepted. If the pressing operation of the left reel stop switch 514a is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S606, and if the pressing operation is accepted, the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the stop control unit 650 transmits a left operation position command indicating the position of the left reel 510a at the time when the left reel stop switch 514a is operated to the effect control unit 800.
In the next step S603, the stop control means 650 validates the pressing operation of the left reel stop switch 514a and turns on the operation valid lamp. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the left reel stop switch 514a has become effective.

In step S604, the stop control means 650 wins the winning combination related to the winning combination winning flag within the range of the number of drawn frames within 4 frames from the position of the left reel 510a when the left reel stop switch 514a is operated. The rotation of the left reel 510a is stopped so as to perform (leave the possibility of winning). When the left reel 510a is the reel that is finally stopped, the left reel 510a is stopped so that a winning combination other than the winning combination related to the winning combination winning flag is not won.
In step S605, the stop control unit 650 transmits a reel stop command (a left stop command) indicating a symbol stopped on the left reel 510a to the effect control unit 800. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S616.

  In step S606, the stop control unit 650 determines whether or not the player has received an operation to press the reel stop switch 14b. If the pressing operation of the inner reel stop switch 14b is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S611. If the pressing operation is accepted, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the stop control unit 650 transmits a middle operation position command indicating the position of the middle reel 510b at the time when the middle reel stop switch 14b is operated to the effect control unit 800.
In the next step S608, the stop control means 650 validates the pressing operation of the inner reel stop switch 14b and turns on the operation valid lamp. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the inner reel stop switch 14b has become effective.

In step S609, the stop control means 650 receives the winning combination related to the winning combination winning flag within the range of the number of drawn frames within 4 frames from the position of the middle reel 510b at the time when the middle reel stop switch 14b is operated. The rotation of the middle reel 510b is stopped so as to perform (leave the possibility of winning). If the middle reel 510b is the reel to be finally stopped, the middle reel 510b is stopped so that a winning combination other than the winning combination related to the winning combination winning flag is not won.
In step S610, the stop control unit 650 transmits a reel stop command (intermediate stop command) indicating a symbol stopped on the inner reel 510b to the effect control unit 800. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S616.

  In step S611, the stop control unit 650 determines whether or not the player has received an operation of pressing the right reel stop switch 14c. If the pressing operation of the right reel stop switch 14c is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S616, and if the pressing operation is accepted, the process proceeds to step S612.

In step S612, the stop control unit 650 transmits a right operation position command indicating the position of the right reel 510c at the time when the right reel stop switch 14c is operated to the effect control unit 800.
In the next step S613, the stop control means 650 validates the pressing operation of the right reel stop switch 14c and lights the operation valid lamp. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the right reel stop switch 14c has become effective.

In step S614, the stop control means 650 receives the winning combination related to the winning combination winning flag within the range of the number of drawn frames within 4 frames from the position of the right reel 510c when the right reel stop switch 14c is operated. The rotation of the right reel 510c is stopped so as to perform (leave the possibility of winning). If the right reel 510c is the reel to be finally stopped, the right reel 510c is stopped so that a winning combination other than the winning combination related to the winning combination winning flag is not won.
In step S615, the stop control unit 650 transmits a reel stop command (right stop command) indicating a symbol stopped on the right reel 510c to the effect control unit 800. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S616.

  In step S616, the stop control unit 650 determines whether or not the reel stop switches 514a, 514b, and 514c have been pressed, and rotation of all the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c has been stopped. If any of the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c has not stopped rotating, the process returns to step S601. If all the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c have stopped rotating, the reel stopping process ends.

<Control device payout process>
Based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 45, the payout process in step S80 will be described.
In step S801, the privilege granting means 670 determines whether or not a bonus transition combination as a special combination is won as a result of the determination in the determination process in step S70. If the special combination is won, the process proceeds to step S802. If the special combination is not won, the process proceeds to step S804.

In step S <b> 802, the privilege granting unit 670 transmits a special role winning command to the effect control unit 800. The special combination winning command includes information that can identify the type of bonus transition combination as a special combination when there are multiple types (for example, a big bonus, a regular bonus, a challenge bonus, etc.).
In step S803, the privilege granting unit 670 sets a bonus flag indicating that the bonus game is being controlled to the special game state in which the bonus game is being executed in the RAM according to the type of the bonus game. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S819.

In step S804, the privilege granting means 670 determines whether or not the RT symbol as a special role has been derived to the winning line as a result of the determination in the determination process in step S70. If the RT symbol has been derived, the process proceeds to step S805. If the RT symbol has been derived, the process proceeds to step S808.
In step S805, the privilege granting means 670 transmits a special combination winning command indicating that the RT symbol has been derived to the effect control unit 800.

In step S806, the privilege granting means 670 sets 201 as an initial value in an RT counter constituted by a down counter for counting the number of RT game digest games.
In step S807, the privilege granting means 670 sets 51 as an initial value in an AT counter configured by a down counter for counting the number of digested games of the AT game. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S819.
Note that the initial values of the RT counter and AT counter are set to 201 and 51 instead of 200 and 50, respectively, because the RT counter and AT counter values are decremented by 1 during the game in step S820. It is.

In step S808, the privilege granting means 670 determines whether or not a replay as a re-gamer has been won as a result of the determination in the determination process in step S70. If it has won the re-gamer, the process proceeds to step S809, and if it has not won the re-gamer, the process proceeds to step S811.
In step S809, the privilege granting means 670 transmits to the effect control unit 800 a replay winning command indicating that the replaying role has been won.

In step S810, the privilege granting means 670 sets a replay winning flag in the RAM so that it can be started without setting the betting number of the next game as a privilege for winning the re-gamer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S819.
If the replay winning flag is set, the bet number 3 is automatically set in the BET process of the next game, and at the same time, the replay winning flag is reset and the process proceeds to the internal lottery process.

In step S811, the privilege granting unit 670 determines whether or not a small role has been won as a result of the determination in step S70. If it has won a small role, the process proceeds to step S812, and if it has not won a small role, the process proceeds to step S819.
In step S812, the privilege granting means 670 transmits a small role winning command to the effect control unit 800. The small role winning command can specify the type of a small role that has been won.

In step S813, the privilege granting means 670 sets the number of medals to be paid out according to the type of the winning small combination in the RAM as the scheduled payout number.
In step S <b> 814, the privilege granting unit 670 transmits a payout start command indicating start of payout of medals to the effect control unit 800.

In step S815, the privilege granting unit 670 instructs the payout control unit 730 to pay out one medal. Based on this instruction, the payout control means 730 pays out only one medal to the player. However, until the credit reaches 50, the payout control means 730 does not pay out the actual medal, A process of adding 1 to the number is performed.
In subsequent step S816, the privilege granting means 670 subtracts 1 from the scheduled payout number set in the RAM.

Further, in step S817, the privilege granting means 670 determines whether or not the scheduled payout number has become zero. If the number of payouts is 0, the process proceeds to step S818. If the number of payouts is not 0, the process returns to step S815, and the process of steps S815 to S817 is performed until the number of payouts is 0. repeat.
In step S818, the privilege granting means 670 transmits to the effect control unit 800 a payout end command indicating that the payout of medals according to the type of the winning small combination has ended. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S819.

  Next, in step S819, the privilege granting means 670 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If it is in the normal gaming state, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S820. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S824.

Next, in step S820, the privilege granting unit 670 decrements the ceiling counter constituted by a down counter for counting the number of games executed in the normal gaming state by one.
The ceiling counter is reset to “777” which is the initial value of the ceiling game number at the start of the bonus game as the special game state or at the end of the bonus game. 777 may be determined by lottery.

  Furthermore, in step S821, the privilege grant unit 670 determines whether or not the ceiling has been reached. That is, if the ceiling counter is “0”, it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and the process proceeds to the next step S822. On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not “0”, it is determined that the ceiling has not been reached, and the process proceeds to step S824.

Next, in step S822, the privilege granting means 670 performs a game number lottery in which the initial game number (51, 101, 201) of the AT game to be started is determined by lottery, and the initial value determined in step S823. The number of games is set in an AT counter constituted by a down counter for counting the number of digest games of the AT game. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S824.
The initial number of AT games is determined by lottery, but 51 may be set in the AT counter in the same manner as when the special combination is won.

  In step S824, the privilege granting means 670 performs a process for controlling the progress of the bonus game as the special game state. That is, processing for grasping the progress of the bonus game (counting of the number of payouts if the number of payouts is a bonus for the end condition, count of the number of games if the number of games is a bonus for the end condition) is performed. If established, the bonus flag is reset and the bonus is ended.

  In step S825, the privilege granting means 670 performs processing for controlling the progress of the RT game and the AT game as the special game state. That is, it is determined whether the value of the RT counter, which is a down counter provided in the RAM, or the value of the AT counter is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, each value is subtracted by 1. . As a result, when both the RT counter value and the AT counter value are 1 or more, the next game is an ART game, and when the RT counter value is 1 or more but the AT counter value is 0, the next game is the next game. This game is an RT game, and when both the RT counter value and the AT counter value are 0, the next game is a normal game.

  Further, in step S826, the privilege granting means 670 refers to the bonus flag, the RT counter, and the AT counter, and transmits a state command indicating the gaming state applied in the next game to the effect control unit 800. Then, the payout process ends.

  When more medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 511 than is necessary for setting the betting number between games being performed as described above, the credit control means 720 adds the amount to the credit. However, when the number of credits reaches 50, the inserted medals are discharged as they are from the medal discharge port 516. Further, when the settlement switch 519 is operated between games, medals accumulated as credits are discharged from the medal discharge port 516 by the credit control means 720.

  When various errors occur during the game being performed as described above or between games, an interrupt is generated and an error interrupt process is performed. The error determination means 700 determines the type of error that has occurred in the error interrupt process, transmits an error command corresponding to the determination result to the effect control unit 800, and then moves the process to an infinite loop. This infinite loop process disables any process for the progress of the game, including setting the bet number. If the reset switch in the slot machine 501 is operated after the cause of the error is removed, the error is canceled, the error interrupt process is terminated, and the normal game process is resumed. In addition, the production control unit 810 performs predetermined error notification according to the error command from the occurrence of the error to the cancellation.

  In parallel with the processing as described above, the information output means 750 performs processing for outputting game information to the outside.

<Game information output setting process of control device>
The game information output setting process executed by the information output means 750 will be described based on the flowchart shown in FIG.

  The game information output setting process is executed in a timer interrupt process that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The game information (game information signal) output from the slot machine 501 uses a plurality of normal game information (normal game information signal) output in parallel communication format using a plurality of output terminals, and a plurality of output terminals. There are a plurality of special game information (special game information signals) output in the serial communication format.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not there is an output timing among the normal game information. If there is no output timing (S901: NO), the process proceeds to step S903. On the other hand, if there is an output timing (S901: YES), in step S902, the output information of the normal game information at the output timing is set in the first external output area of the main RAM. Thereby, the output of the normal game information signal to the outside is started.

  Next, in step S903, it is determined whether or not there is a normal game information that has reached an output stop timing. If there is no output stop timing (S903: NO), the process proceeds to step S905. On the other hand, if there is an output stop timing (S903: YES), in step S904, the normal game information output information at the output stop timing is cleared from the first external output area of the main RAM. As a result, the output of the normal game information signal to the outside is stopped.

  Next, in step S905, it is determined whether there is any special game information that has reached the output timing. If there is no output timing (step S905: NO), the current game information output setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an output timing (step S905: YES), in step S906, the output information of the special game information at the output timing is set in the second external output area of the main RAM. As a result, the special game information signal is output to the outside.

  When an event for which special game information is to be output (see FIG. 48) occurs, the main control unit 610 stores information related to the event in a first-in first-out buffer. When the information is stored in the buffer in step S905, the information output means 750 determines that the special game information corresponding to the information at the head of the information has come to the output timing. The information output means 750 deletes the information for which the corresponding special game information has been output from the buffer. If other information is stored in the buffer after the deleted information, the new information becomes the first information at the beginning, and it is determined that the output timing has been reached. Following the game information, special game information corresponding to the other information is output.

<Description of game information signal>
FIG. 47 shows the type (type) of game information signal output from each output terminal (first terminal to eleventh terminal) provided on the external output terminal board, the output timing (output opportunity) of the game information signal, and the game It is a figure which shows the output period of an information signal. The first terminal to the eighth terminal are output terminals for outputting a normal game signal, and the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal are output terminals for outputting a special game signal.

  The first terminal has an error signal (door open error signal, abnormal winning error signal, magnetic error signal, radio wave error signal) indicating that a predetermined error (door opening error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error) has occurred. Are common output terminals that are output over a predetermined period.

The door opening error signal is output when the front door 505 is detected to be open, and the output period is when the front door 505 is open. That is, the output stop timing is when the front door 505 is closed.
The abnormal winning error signal has an output timing when an abnormal winning is detected, and an output period is 60 seconds from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is 60 seconds after the start of output.

The magnetic error signal has an output timing when magnetism exceeding a predetermined threshold is detected, and an output period is 60 seconds from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is 60 seconds after the start of output.
The radio wave error signal has an output timing when a radio wave having a predetermined frequency is detected, and the output period is 60 seconds from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is 60 seconds after the start of output.
The reel error signal has an output timing when a reel error when the reel is not rotating normally is detected, and the output period is 60 seconds from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is 60 seconds after the start of output.

  When a plurality of errors occur at the same time, the output periods of the plurality of error signals overlap. However, the errors may be output in the order in which the errors occur.

  The second terminal is an output terminal from which a medal OUT signal indicating that a unit number (for example, one) of medals has actually been paid out is output. The medal OUT signal has an output timing when the payout of the unit number of medals is completed, and an output period is 16 ms from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is when 16 ms elapses from the output start. Note that the payout of medals here includes a payout by winning a small role.

  The third terminal is an output terminal from which a medal IN signal indicating that a unit number (for example, one) of medals has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 511 is output. The medal IN signal has an output timing when a unit number of medals are inserted, and an output period of 16 ms from the start of output. That is, the output stop timing is when 16 ms elapses from the output start. In this case, the insertion of medals includes insertion for setting the number of bets and insertion for accumulating credits. However, since the credit has reached 50, insertion from the medal insertion unit 511 is performed as it is. When discharged to the outlet 516, it is not included.

  The fourth terminal is an output terminal from which a BB signal indicating that a big bonus as a special game is being executed is output. The in-BB signal has an output timing at the start of the big bonus game and an output period during the big bonus game. That is, the output stop timing is the end of the big bonus game.

  The fifth terminal is an output terminal from which a signal during RB indicating that a regular bonus as a special game is being executed is output. The in-RB signal has an output timing at the start of the regular bonus game, and an output period during the regular bonus game. That is, the end of the regular bonus game is the output stop timing.

  The sixth terminal is an output terminal for outputting a CB signal indicating that a challenge bonus as a special game is being executed. The CB medium signal has an output timing at the start of the challenge bonus game, and an output period during the challenge bonus game. That is, the output stop timing is the end of the challenge bonus game.

  The seventh terminal is an output terminal for outputting a signal during RT indicating that replay as a special game is being executed. The in-RT signal has an output timing at the start of the replay time game, and an output period during the replay time game. That is, the output stop timing is the end of the replay game.

  The eighth terminal is an output terminal from which an AT signal indicating that the assist time as a special game is being executed is output. The AT signal is the output timing at the start of the assist game, and the output period is during the assist game. That is, the output stop timing is the end of the assist game.

  The ninth terminal is an output terminal from which an information type signal indicating the type of special game information is output. The information type signal has an output period of 64 ms from each output timing described later (see FIG. 48). That is, the output stop timing is 64 ms after the start of output.

  The tenth terminal is an output terminal from which a numerical information signal indicating the details of the special game information corresponding to the information type signal is output. The numerical information signal has an output period of 64 ms from each output timing described later (see FIG. 48). That is, the output stop timing is 64 ms after the start of output.

  The eleventh terminal is an output terminal that outputs a timing signal for notifying the outside of the slot machine 501 of the acquisition (output) timing of the information type signal and the numerical information signal. The timing signal has an output period of 64 ms from each output timing described later (see FIG. 48). That is, the output stop timing is 64 ms after the start of output.

<Explanation of special game information signal>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the details of the information type signal and the numerical information signal constituting the special game information signal, and the output timing (output trigger).

  The information type signal is an 8-bit (1 byte) data signal indicating the type (type) of the special game information, and the numerical information signal is 8 bits (1 byte) indicating the details (numeric value) of the special game information. From the external output terminal board 86, three types of information type signal, numerical information signal and timing signal are outputted as a set.

  Special game information types include: setting change information, set value information, credit amount information, credit settlement information, settlement completion information, gaming state information, random number (upper byte) information, random number (lower byte) information, bonus internal winning Information, RT internal winning information, small role internal winning information, replay internal winning information, lose internal winning information, wait occurrence information, freeze winning information, AT extra information, freeze end information, all reel rotation start information, left reel stop operation position Information, middle reel stop operation position information, right reel stop operation position information, left reel stop symbol information, middle reel stop symbol information, right reel stop symbol information, bonus prize information, RT prize information, small role prize information, replay prize information , Medal payout information, payout end information, ceiling remaining game number information, AT game number information, and error occurrence information.

  The setting change in-progress information is information indicating that a setting value changing operation is being performed, and the output timing (step S101 in the start-up process) is the time when shifting to the setting change mode. The setting changing information is composed of an information type signal indicating that the setting is being changed and numerical signal information indicating that the setting is being changed.

  The set value information is information indicating the set value determined in the setting change mode, and the time when the set value is determined is the output timing (step S111 in the activation process). The set value information is composed of an information type signal indicating a set value and numerical signal information indicating a determined set value (1 to 6).

  The credit amount information is information indicating the number of credits accumulated in the slot machine 501 and the start timing of each game is the output timing (step S302 in the internal lottery process). The credit number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of credits and a numerical information signal indicating the value of the accumulated credit number (0 to 50).

  The credit settlement information is information indicating that the settlement of credit accumulated in the slot machine 501 is instructed, and the output timing is when the settlement switch 519 is operated to settle the credit. The credit settlement information is composed of an information type signal indicating credit settlement and a numerical information signal indicating credit settlement.

  The settlement completion information is information indicating that all credits accumulated in the slot machine 501 have been settled and discharged from the medal discharge port 516, and the output timing is when credit settlement ends. The settlement end information is composed of an information type signal indicating completion of settlement and a numerical information signal indicating completion of settlement.

  The game state information is information indicating the game state applied to the game, and the output timing (step S302 in the internal lottery process) is when the bet number set for the game is determined. The gaming state information is based on an information type signal indicating a gaming state and a numerical information signal indicating a type of gaming state (big bonus, regular bonus, challenge bonus, RT, AT, normal) applied to the game. It is configured.

  The random number (upper byte) information is information indicating the upper byte of the random numbers (2 bytes) extracted in the internal lottery, and the output timing (step S302 in the internal lottery process) when the random number is extracted (at the start of the game). It has become. The random number (upper byte) information is composed of an information type signal indicating a random number (upper byte) and a numerical information signal indicating a value (0 to 255) indicated by the upper byte of the extracted random number. Yes.

  The random number (lower byte) information is information indicating the lower byte of the random numbers (2 bytes) extracted in the internal lottery, and the output timing (step S302 in the internal lottery process) when the random number is extracted (at the start of the game). It has become. The random number (lower byte) information is composed of an information type signal indicating a random number (lower byte) and a numerical information signal indicating a value (0 to 255) indicated by the lower byte of the extracted random number. Yes.

  Bonus internal winning information is information indicating that a bonus as a special role has been won (including the case of winning in the internal lottery in the game and the case of being carried over from the previous game). Is the output timing (step S302 in the internal lottery process). The bonus internal winning information is composed of an information type signal indicating that it is a bonus internal winning, and a numerical information signal indicating the type of bonus (big bonus, regular bonus, challenge bonus) won in the game. .

  The RT internal winning information is information indicating that a role that allows the RT symbol accompanying the transition to RT to be derived has been won, and the output timing (internal lottery process) at the end of the internal lottery (at the start of the game) Step S302). The RT internal winning information is composed of an information type signal indicating that the role that allows the RT symbol to be derived and a numerical information signal indicating that the role that allows the RT symbol to be derived is selected. ing.

  The small winning combination / replay / losing internal winning information is information indicating that the small winning combination, replaying, or losing is won, and the output timing (step S302 in the internal lottery process) when the internal lottery ends (when the game starts). ). The small winning combination / replay / losing internal winning information includes an information type signal indicating that the winning combination is a small winning combination, replay or losing, and the type of winning combination (small winning combination 1, small winning combination 2, small winning combination) in the game. And a numerical information signal indicating a combination 3 (replay, loss).

  The weight information is information indicating that a weight is generated by operating the start switch 513 without passing a predetermined time from the start of rotation of the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c in the previous game. Is the output timing (step S504 in the reel rotation process). The weight information is composed of an information type signal indicating that a weight has occurred and a numerical information signal indicating the occurrence of a weight.

  The freeze winning information is information indicating that a freeze state has occurred and the progress of the game has been disabled, and the time when the freeze occurs is the output timing (step S409 in the freeze effect process). The freeze winning information is composed of an information type signal indicating the occurrence of a freeze state and a numerical information signal indicating the type (free or long) of the generated freeze state.

  The AT addition information is information indicating that the addition of the number of AT games is determined, and the time when the addition is determined is the output timing (step S415 in the freeze effect process). The AT addition information is composed of an information type signal indicating the determination of addition and a numerical information signal indicating the number of games to be added (+10, +20).

  The freeze end information is information indicating that the freeze state has ended and the progress of the game is enabled, and the end of the freeze is the output timing (step S417 in the freeze effect process). The freeze end information is composed of an information type signal indicating that the freeze state has ended and the progress of the game has been enabled, and a numerical information signal indicating the end of the freeze state.

  The all-reel rotation start information is information indicating that all the reels 510a, 510b, 510c have actually started to rotate, and the output timing is when the rotation of the reels 510a, 510b, 510c starts (step S503 in the reel rotation process). It has become. The all-reel rotation start information is composed of an information type signal indicating the start of rotation of all the reels 510a, 510b and 510c and a numerical information signal indicating the start of rotation.

  The left reel stop operation position information is information indicating a symbol located on the winning line among symbols of the left reel 510a when the left reel stop switch 514a is operated, and the left reel stop switch 514a. Is the output timing (step S602 in the reel stop process). The left reel stop operation position information includes an information type signal indicating the left reel stop operation position, and a symbol positioned on the winning line among the symbols of the left reel 510a when the left reel stop switch 514a is operated. And a numerical information signal indicating the number (0 to 20).

  The left reel stop symbol information is information indicating the symbols actually stopped on the winning line among the symbols of the left reel 510a, and the stop timing of the left reel 510a is the output timing (step S605 in the reel stop process). It has become. The left reel stop symbol information is based on an information type signal indicating the left reel stop symbol and a numerical information signal indicating the number (0 to 20) of the symbol actually stopped on the winning line among the symbols of the left reel 510a. Composed.

  The middle reel stop operation position information is information indicating the symbol located on the winning line among the symbols of the middle reel 510b at the time when the middle reel stop switch 14b is operated, and the middle reel stop switch 14b. Is the output timing (step S607 in the reel stop process). The middle reel stop operation position information includes the information type signal indicating the middle reel stop operation position, and the symbol located on the winning line among the symbols of the middle reel 510b when the middle reel stop switch 14b is operated. And a numerical information signal indicating the number (0 to 20).

  The middle reel stop symbol information is information indicating the symbols actually stopped on the winning line among the symbols of the middle reel 510b, and the stop timing of the middle reel 510b is the output timing (step S610 in the reel stop processing). It has become. The medium reel stop symbol information includes an information type signal indicating the medium reel stop symbol and a numerical information signal indicating the number (0 to 20) of the symbol actually stopped on the winning line among the symbols of the middle reel 510b. Composed.

  The right reel stop operation position information is information indicating a symbol located on the winning line among the symbols of the right reel 510c when the right reel stop switch 14c is operated, and the right reel stop switch 14c. Is the output timing (step S612 in the reel stop process). The right reel stop operation position information includes the information type signal indicating the right reel stop operation position, and the symbol positioned on the winning line among the symbols of the right reel 510c when the right reel stop switch 14c is operated. And a numerical information signal indicating the number (0 to 20).

  The right reel stop symbol information is information indicating the symbols actually stopped on the winning line among the symbols of the right reel 510c, and when the right reel 510c is stopped, the output timing (step S615 in the reel stop process) and It has become. The right reel stop symbol information includes an information type signal indicating the right reel stop symbol and a numerical information signal indicating the number (0 to 20) of the symbol actually stopped on the winning line among the symbols of the right reel 510c. Composed.

  The winning information is information indicating that a winning combination has been won in the game, and the winning determination time is the output timing (steps S802, S805, S809, S812 in the payout process). The winning information includes an information type signal indicating winning and a numerical information signal indicating the type of winning combination (big bonus, regular bonus, challenge bonus, RT, small role 1, small role 2, small role 3, replay). Composed.

  The medal payout information is information indicating that the medal payout starts based on the small role winning, and the output timing (step S814 in the payout processing) is the time when the medal payout starts (when the scheduled payout number is set) due to the small role winning. ). The medal payout information includes an information type signal indicating medal payout and a numerical information signal indicating the number of medals to be paid out (1 to 15).

  The payout end information is information indicating that the payout of medals based on the small role winning is completed, and the output timing (step S818 in the payout process) is the end of the medal payout due to the small role winning. The payout end information is composed of an information type signal indicating the payout end and a numerical information signal indicating the payout end.

The information on the number of remaining games on the ceiling is information indicating the number of games remaining until the number of games executed in the normal gaming state reaches the number of ceiling games (777 times), and after the payout of medals (at the end of the game) Is the output timing (step S820 in the payout process). The ceiling game number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of remaining games on the ceiling and a numerical information signal indicating the number of remaining games on the ceiling (0 to 255).
When the remaining number of games up to the ceiling game number is 254 games or less, a numerical information signal corresponding to the remaining number of games is output, but when the number of games up to the ceiling game number is 255 or more, it is fixed. The numerical information signal (here, “255”) is output.

  The AT game number information is information indicating the number of remaining AT games, and the time when the number of AT games is updated is the output timing (steps S807, S820, and S825 in the payout process). The AT game number information is composed of an information type signal indicating the number of AT games and a numerical information signal indicating the number of AT games.

  The error occurrence information is information indicating that various errors (door opening error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, reel error) have occurred, and the output timing is when various errors occur. The error occurrence information includes an information type signal indicating an error occurrence and a numerical information signal indicating the type of error that has occurred.

<Example of special game information output>
Next, output examples of special game information (information type signal, numerical information signal, timing signal) at various output timings will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The information type signal and the numerical information signal are output from the ninth terminal and the tenth terminal of the external output terminal plate, respectively, and when the output bit changes from 0 to 7 every 8 ms from the start of output, and 64 ms elapses. Thus, output of 8 bits (1 byte) is completed.

  In addition, the timing signal is output from the eleventh terminal of the external output terminal plate, is normally ON (high level), and is OFF (low level) during the output of the information type signal and the numerical information signal. The timing of outputting the special game information signal (reading start, reading end) is notified to the outside.

  FIG. 49 shows credit number information, random number (upper byte) information, random number from the external output terminal board (9th terminal to 11th terminal) when the start switch 513 is operated (at the start of the game) after the bet number is confirmed. It is a timing chart in the case of outputting (lower byte) information, bonus internal winning information, and small / replay internal winning information.

  When the operation of the start switch 513 is detected at the timing of T1, output of an information type signal indicating the number of credits and a numerical information signal indicating the number of credits (47) is started, and the timing signal is turned ON (high level). ) To OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T2, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the credit number information is completed.

  Subsequently, at the timing of T3, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T2, an information type signal indicating a random number (upper byte) and numerical information indicating the value (12) of the upper byte of the random number The signal output is started and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T4, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of random number (upper byte) information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T4 at the timing of T5, an information type signal indicating a random number (lower byte) and numerical information indicating the value (253) of the upper byte of the random number The signal output is started and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T6, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of random number (lower byte) information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T6 at the timing of T7, an information type signal indicating that the bonus is won internally, and that the type of the winning bonus is a big bonus. The output of the numerical information signal is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T8, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of bonus internal winning information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T8 at the timing of T9, an information type signal indicating that it is an internal winning of a small role or a replay, and the type of the winning combination in the game Output of a numerical information signal indicating replay is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T10, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the winning combination / replay internal winning information is completed.

  As described above, when the operation of the start switch 513 is detected, the credit amount information, random number (upper byte) information, random number (lower byte) information, bonus internal winning information, and small role / replay internal winning information are output to the outside of the slot machine 501. Thus, it is possible to grasp specific information such as the number of credits and the result of the internal lottery outside the slot machine 501.

  FIG. 50 is a timing chart in the case where freeze winning information, AT addition information, freeze end information, and all reel rotation start information are output from the external output terminal board (the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal) when the freeze state occurs.

  When the freeze (long) is won and the progress of the game is disabled at the timing of T1, an information type signal indicating that a freeze state has occurred and that the type of freeze state that has occurred is long. The output of the numerical information signal is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

At the timing of T2, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the freeze winning information is completed.
In this period, it is assumed that 10 games are determined as the number of games to be added to the AT.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) has elapsed from the timing of T2 at the timing of T3, the output of the information type signal indicating the determination of addition and the numerical information signal indicating the number of games to be added (10) is started. The timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T4, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the AT addition information is completed.

  Subsequently, at the timing of T5, the output of the information type signal indicating that the freeze state is ended and the progress of the game is enabled, and the numerical information signal indicating the end of the freeze state are started, and the timing signal is turned on. Switch from (high level) to OFF (low level).

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the freeze end information is completed.
Note that rotation of all reels 510a, 510b, 510c is started simultaneously with the end of the freeze state (because no weight is generated when controlled to the freeze state).

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T6 at the timing of T7, an output of an information type signal indicating the start of rotation of all the reels 510a, 510b and 510c and a numerical information signal indicating the start of rotation are output. The timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T8, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of all reel rotation start information is completed.

  As described above, when the freeze state occurs, the freeze winning information, the AT addition information, and the freeze end information are output to the outside of the slot machine 501, so that the occurrence of the freeze state, the duration time, and the number of AT games are outside the slot machine 501. It is possible to grasp specific information such as additions.

  FIG. 51 shows that when the right reel stop switch 14c is last operated and the right reel 510c stops and wins the small role 1 (at the start of the game), the external output terminal board (the ninth terminal to the eleventh terminal). Is a timing chart when outputting right reel stop operation position information, right reel stop symbol information, winning information, medal payout information, and payout end information.

  When the operation of the right reel stop switch 14c is detected at the timing T1, the information type signal indicating the right reel stop operation position and the symbol of the right reel 510c at the time when the right reel stop switch 14c is operated Then, the output of the numerical information signal indicating the symbol number 4) located on the winning line is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T2, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the right reel stop operation position information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T2, at the timing of T3, the information type signal indicating the right reel stop symbol and the symbol of the right reel 510c are actually stopped on the winning line. The output of the numerical information signal indicating the symbol number (6) is started, and the timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T4, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the right reel stop symbol information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T4 at the timing of T5, the output of the information type signal indicating the winning and the numerical information signal indicating the type of the winning combination (small role 1) is started. The timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  When the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends at the timing of T6, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the winning information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing of T6 at the timing of T7, the output of the information type signal indicating the medal payout and the numerical information signal indicating the number of medals to be paid out (15) is started. The timing signal is switched from ON (high level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T8, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of medal payout information is completed.

  Subsequently, when the output interval (8 ms) elapses from the timing T8 at the timing T9, the output of the information type signal indicating the end of payout and the numerical information signal indicating the end of payout is started, and the timing signal is turned ON (high). Level) to OFF (low level).

  At the timing of T10, when the output period of the information type signal and the numerical information signal ends, the timing signal is switched from OFF (low level) to ON (high level), and the output of the payout end information is completed.

  As described above, when the operation of the last one of the stop switches 514a, 514b, and 514c is detected, the right (left and middle) reel stop operation position information and the right (left and middle) reel stop symbol information are followed by winning. By outputting the information, the medal payout information, and the payout end information to the outside of the slot machine 501, it is possible to grasp specific information such as the occurrence of a prize and the payout of medals outside the slot machine 501.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, special game information (information type signal, numerical information signal) is output via the external output terminal board by the information output means 750 at various output timings. Specific (detailed) game information corresponding to the progress can be output to the outside of the slot machine 501. As a result, it is possible to analyze detailed game information outside the slot machine 501 and to perform a predetermined effect at the island facility using the detailed game information.

  The special game information includes random number (upper byte) information and random number (lower byte) information, bonus internal winning information, RT internal winning information, and small role / replay internal winning information. In other words, since the winning combination at the time of the internal lottery can be output to the outside of the slot machine 501, a privilege is granted based on the winning of the combination (game state transition, medal payout, replay grant). Before, it is possible to perform effects and the like assuming subsequent benefits with island facilities.

<Production control processing of control device>
The effect control process by the effect control unit 800 will be described based on the flowchart shown in FIG. This process is performed when the effect control unit 800 receives some command from the main control unit 610.
In step S1001, the effect control unit 800 analyzes what kind of command the received command is. The command analysis result is temporarily stored in the RAM of the effect control unit 800.

  In step S1002, effect control unit 800 determines whether or not the analyzed command is the addition command transmitted in step S410. If it is not an add command, the process proceeds to step S1004. If it is an add command, the process proceeds to step S1003.

  In step S1003, the process is transferred to the additional notification unit 820, and the additional notification unit 820 requests the sub-side effect driving unit 840 to perform processing, and adds the number of AT games indicated by the additional command to the LED display 520 or the liquid crystal display. The information is displayed on the display unit 509 or output from the speakers 517a and 517b to notify the player. Then, the process based on the command received this time is terminated.

  In step S1004, effect control unit 800 determines whether or not the analyzed command is the stop validation command transmitted in step S507. If it is not a stop validation command, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if it is a stop validation command, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, the process is transferred to the AT notification unit 830. The AT notification unit 830 sets the current game as an AT game based on the information indicated by the state command received at the end of the previous game and stored in the RAM. It is determined whether or not. If the current game is not an AT game, the process based on the command received this time is terminated, and if the current game is an AT game, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, the AT notification means 830 has won a small role that is to be notified in the AT game in the current game based on the information indicated by the winning command transmitted in S306 and stored in the RAM. Determine whether. If the small role to be notified has not been won, the process based on the command received this time is terminated, and if the small role to be notified is selected, the process proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1007, the AT notification unit 830 requests the sub-side effect driving unit 840 to perform processing, and displays the stop operation order of the reel stop switches 514a, 514b, and 514c regarding the small role to be notified, the winning symbol, and the like by LED display. The information is displayed on the device 520 or the liquid crystal display 509, or the sound is output from the speakers 517a and 517b to notify the player. Then, the process based on the command received this time is terminated.

  In step S1008, the effect control means 810 requests the sub-side effect drive means 840 to perform processing based on the command received this time or information temporarily stored for the commands received so far. I do. Details of this effect will not be described. Then, the process based on the command received this time is terminated.

<Special effect execution processing of control device>
Based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 53, the special effect execution process by the effect control unit 800 will be described. This process is performed by inputting a clock pulse from the CTC circuit every predetermined period (4 ms) to the effect control unit 800.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not start information for a pre-special effect has been input. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first input acceptance switch 523a is turned on. If there is no input of the start information of the special special effect (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1105. On the other hand, if the start information of the pre-special effect is input (S1101: YES), the execution information of the pre-special effect is set in a predetermined area of the RAM in step S1102. Thereby, the advance special effect using the LED display 520 and the speaker 517 is started.

  Next, in step S1103, the end condition determination table for slots (see FIG. 54) is checked in advance by comparing the current game situation (whether it is in the normal game state, A (R) T, or in bonus). In step S1104, a special effect end condition is set in a predetermined area of the RAM, and the special special effect end condition is set, and the special effect execution process ends. Details of the slot end condition determination table will be described later.

As a condition for ending the special special effect, if the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state and within 6 ceiling games, an AT game that is executed when the number of remaining ceiling games is “0” starts. If the current gaming situation is in the normal gaming state and the bonus is not selected, either the first of 25 seconds from the start of the special special effect or the end of 5 games, whichever comes first If it is established and the current gaming situation is in the normal gaming state and the bonus is being won, it will be established whichever comes first, 10 seconds after the start of the special special performance or until the bonus winning ing.
Also, if the current game state is A (R) T and the bonus is not won, either 20 seconds after the start of the special special effect or 3 games end, whichever comes first If the current game state is A (R) T and a bonus is being won, the first 10 seconds after the start of the special special effect or the bonus winning is established, whichever comes first .
Further, when the current game situation is in the bonus, 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the pre-special effect or 3 games have ended, whichever comes first.

  Next, in step S1105, it is determined whether or not the start information of the changing special effect has been input. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second input acceptance switch 523b is turned on. If there is no input of start information for the special effect during change (S1105: NO), the process proceeds to step S1109. On the other hand, when the start information of the changing special effect is input (S1105: YES), the execution information of the changing special effect is set in a predetermined area of the RAM in step S1106. As a result, the special effect during fluctuation using the LED display 520 and the speaker 517 is started.

  Next, in step S1107, the current game situation (whether it is in the normal gaming state, A (R) T or bonus, etc.) is collated with the slot end condition determination table (see FIG. 54) and changed. The end condition of the medium special effect is determined, and in step S1108, the end condition of the changing special effect as the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the RAM, and the current special effect execution process ends.

As a condition for ending the special effect during change, if the current game situation is in the normal game state and within 6 games on the ceiling, either 10 seconds from the start of the special effect during change or the end of two games If the earlier game is established and the current game status is in the normal gaming state and the bonus is not selected, either the first 10 seconds after the start of the special effect during the change or the end of the two games, whichever comes first If the current gaming situation is in the normal gaming state and the bonus is being won, the establishment of the special special effect during the change or the bonus winning, whichever comes first, will be It has become.
If the current game situation is A (R) T and the bonus is not selected, either 10 seconds after the start of the special effect during change or the end of 2 games, whichever comes first When the current game situation is A (R) T and the bonus is being won, the time is 20 seconds after the start of the special effect during change or the bonus winning, whichever comes first.
When the current gaming state is in bonus, it is established whichever comes first, 10 seconds after the start of the changing special effect or until the end of the two games.

  Next, in step S1109, it is determined whether or not error special effect start information has been input. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third input acceptance switch 523c is turned on. If there is no input of error special effect start information (S1109: NO), the process proceeds to step S1114. On the other hand, if there is input of error special effect start information (S1109: YES), if there is execution information of another special effect (previous special effect, changing special effect) in RAM in step S1110, the execution is performed. The information is cleared, and in step S1111, the execution information of the error special effect is set in a predetermined area of the RAM. As a result, the error special effect using the LED display 520 and the speaker 517 is started (in place of the pre-special effect or the special effect during change).

  Next, in step S1112, the slot end condition determination table (see FIG. 54) is compared with the current gaming status (whether it is in the normal gaming state, A (R) T or bonus, etc.) and an error. The termination condition of the special effect is determined, and in step S1113, the termination condition of the error special effect that is the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the RAM, and the current special effect execution process is terminated.

As a condition for ending the special error production, if the current game situation is in the normal gaming state, the special error production is performed regardless of whether the game is within the ceiling 6 games, bonus non-winning or bonus winning. It has been 20 seconds since the start of the production.
In the case of A (R) T, it has been 20 seconds since the start of the error special effect regardless of whether the bonus is not won or not.
In the case of a bonus, 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the error special effect.

  Next, in step S1114, it is determined whether or not a pre-special effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not execution information for a pre-special effect is set in the RAM. If the pre-special effect is not being executed (S1114: NO), the process proceeds to step S1118. On the other hand, when the pre-special effect is being executed (S1114: YES), the process proceeds to step S1115.

  Next, in step S1115, it is determined whether or not an end condition for the advance special effect set in the RAM is satisfied. If the condition for ending the special special effect is satisfied (S1115: YES), the execution information of the special special effect set in the RAM is cleared in step S1116, and this special effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the advance special effect ends. On the other hand, if the condition for ending the special special effect is not satisfied (S1115: NO), the special special effect execution process for controlling the advance of the special special effect is performed in step S1117, and this special effect execution process is ended. To do.

  Next, in step S1118, it is determined whether or not the changing special effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the execution information of the changing special effect is set in the RAM. If the special effect during change is not being executed (S1118: NO), the process proceeds to step S1122. On the other hand, when the changing special effect is being executed (S1118: YES), the process proceeds to step S1119.

  Next, in step S1119, it is determined whether or not the changing special effect end condition set in the RAM is satisfied. If the changing special effect end condition is satisfied (S1119: YES), the execution information of the changing special effect set in the RAM is cleared in step S1120, and the current special effect executing process is terminated. As a result, the special special effect during the change ends. On the other hand, if the end condition of the changing special effect is not satisfied (S1119: NO), the changing special effect executing process for controlling the progress of the changing special effect is performed in step S1121, and this special effect execution is performed. End the process.

  Next, in step S1122, it is determined whether an error special effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the execution information of the error special effect is set in the RAM. If the error special effect is not being executed (S1122: NO), this special effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if the error special effect is being executed (S1122: YES), the process proceeds to step S1123.

  Next, in step S1123, it is determined whether an end condition for the error special effect set in the RAM is satisfied. If the error special effect termination condition is satisfied (S1123: YES), in step S1124, the error special effect execution information set in the RAM is cleared, and the current special effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the error special effect ends. On the other hand, if the end condition for the error special effect is not satisfied (S1123: NO), in step S1125, an error special effect execution process for controlling the progress of the error special effect is performed, and the current special effect execution process is terminated. To do.

  In this manner, predetermined game information (specific information) that triggers input to the slot machine 501 is output to an external device provided outside the slot machine 501, and as a result, the player is difficult to operate or When an input from an external device is received via an input receiving device 523 provided at an inoperable position, a special effect is performed. Therefore, a special effect can be executed by performing input / output with an external device. In addition, it is possible to manage whether or not the special effect is executed in the slot machine 501 in the external device and the timing to execute the special effect.

  Further, depending on the type of input received by the input reception device 523 (which one of the first input reception switch 523a to the third input reception switch 523c received the input), different types of special effects (prior special effects, changing special effects) Error special effects). Therefore, it is possible to increase variations of special effects executed by the slot machine 501 and improve the appeal to the player.

  In addition, based on the fact that the input received from the outside of the slot machine 501 is the first input for turning on the first input receiving switch 523a (input of the start information of the pre-special effect), the AT game is executed. A pre-special effect that suggests (notices) that the AT game may be executed before the period (several games) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the AT game will be executed before the game in which the AT game is to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that a plurality of advance special effect production patterns are provided, and if there is input of advance special production start information, the advance special effect production pattern is determined by lottery, and the advance special production is executed with the decided production pattern. It may be.

  Further, based on the fact that the input received from the outside of the slot machine 501 is the second input for turning on the second input receiving switch 523b (input of start information of the special effect during change), the special role (big bonus combination) , Regular bonus role, challenge bonus role) In the game that was won internally, special effects during the change will be executed to suggest (notice) that there is a possibility that the special role will be won internally (bonus game will be executed) It has become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the internal winning of the special role (bonus game is executed) during the game where the special role is internally won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. . In addition, if there are multiple production patterns for changing special effects, and the start information for the changing special effects is input, the changing special effects effect pattern is determined by lottery, and the changing special effects are performed using the determined effect pattern. May be executed.

  Further, based on the fact that the input received from the outside of the slot machine 501 is the third input for turning on the third input reception switch 523c (input of the start information of the error special effect), the slot machine over a predetermined period. In 501, an error special effect that notifies that a predetermined error has occurred is executed. For this reason, the player can accurately notify the employee of the game hall that an error has occurred, and the security of the slot machine 501 can be enhanced. In addition, if there are multiple error special effects production patterns corresponding to the type of error, and there is input of error special production start information, error special effects are produced with the production pattern according to the type of error that has occurred. You may make it perform.

  In the present embodiment, input from the outside of the slot machine 501 is accepted by three of the first input acceptance switch 523a to the third input acceptance switch 523c, but the number of input acceptance switches may be less than three. It may be good or a large number. For example, when only one input acceptance switch is provided, it is determined that the start information of the pre-special effect has been input when the number of times of turning on within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) is 1, and turned on. If the number of times is 2, it is determined that the start information of the changing special effect has been input, and if the number of times of ON is 3, the error special effect start information has been input. In addition, when two input reception switches are provided, it is determined that one of the input reception switches is turned on, the start information of the pre-special effect is input, and when the other input reception switch is turned on, the special effect during change is determined. It may be determined that there has been input of the start information, and if both input acceptance switches are turned on, it is determined that the start information of the error special effect has been input.

  Further, instead of an input reception switch that receives a physical pressing operation, an input from the outside of the slot machine 501 may be received by a non-contact input reception module that receives infrared rays or radio waves. Input from the outside of 501 may be received directly from the harness by the input / output interface circuit (IO).

<End condition determination table for slot>
FIG. 54 shows an example of the slot end condition determination table, which is referred to in the special effect execution process described with reference to FIG.

  In the slot end condition determination table, the types of special effects (preliminary special effects, changing special effects, error special effects) for determining the end conditions, and the game situation (in normal gaming state, during A (R) T, Bonus etc.) and the content of the end condition are associated with each other.

  According to the slot end condition determination table, when the special special effect is executed when the game is in the normal gaming state and within six games from the ceiling, the special special effect is continued until the AT game is started. Will be executed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to talk about the start of AT game over a plurality of times, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the slot end condition determination table, when a special special effect is executed during the normal gaming state or during A (R) T, the special special effect is executed during the bonus non-winning and during the bonus winning. The period is different. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to suggest whether the bonus is won or not by the execution period of the special special effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the pre-special effect execution period is longer when the bonus is not won than when the bonus is won, but it may be reversed.

  Further, according to the slot end condition determination table, when the special effect during change is executed during the normal gaming state or during A (R) T, the special effect during change between the bonus non-winning and the bonus winning is being performed. The execution period of is different. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to suggest whether the bonus is won or not by the execution period of the special effect during change, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that, while the bonus non-winning is longer than the bonus winning, the execution period of the changing special effect is longer, but it may be reversed.

  In addition, according to the slot end condition determination table, it is easier for the effect to be executed over a longer period when the special special effect is executed than when the changing special effect is executed. . By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform the production according to the period until the advantageous state (AT game, bonus) to be suggested occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the slot end condition determination table, when the error special effect is started, the error special effect is continued for the same period (20 seconds) regardless of the game situation. This makes it possible to effectively notify that an error has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect is ended when the end condition set at the start of the special effect is satisfied. However, the special effect is at least one of the pre-special effect, the changing special effect, and the error special effect. It may be until the end information of the production is input. For example, the input receiving device 523 may be provided with a fourth input receiving switch, and when the fourth input receiving switch is turned on, the special effect being executed may be ended as if the special effect end information has been input. When any two or three of the input reception switches 523a to 523c are simultaneously turned on, the special effect being executed may be terminated as if the special effect end information has been input. .

<Examples of special special effects produced by slot machines>
With reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, description will be given of an effect example in the case where the start information of the pre-special effects is simultaneously input to the plurality of slot machines 501 and the pre-special effects are executed all at once.
As a premise, an information input device for inputting to the input reception device so as to correspond to each of the input reception devices of eight slot machines 501 (for example, 1st to 8th) installed on the amusement island Is provided. Here, the description will be made by picking up the first slot machine 501 installed at the left end and the eighth slot machine 501 installed at the right end.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the first slot machine 501 is in the customer waiting state, and the LED display 520 performs the customer waiting light emission corresponding to the customer waiting state. The eighth slot machine 501 is in a game, and a game effect is executed on the liquid crystal display 509 and the LED display 520. At this time, the information input device provided corresponding to the input receiving device 523 of the 1st to 8th slot machines 501 is not operating.

  In this state, when the game and the game production are started in the first slot machine 501 and the ceiling counter becomes “6”, the AT game is executed in six games from the external output terminal board of the first slot machine 501. Information indicating the number of games remaining on the ceiling, that is, specific information that triggers an input from the external device to the slot machine 501 is output.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the drive signal of the information input device corresponding to each of the input receiving devices 87 of the first to eighth slot machines 501 is output from the external device that has received the specific information. The first actuator of the information input device is actuated, and the first input reception switch 523a of the input reception device 523 is pressed and turned on (the start information of the pre-special effect is input), and the first to eighth slot machines 501 The special special effect is started in each of the above, and the character information of “Attach time” is displayed on the LED display 520. In the eighth slot machine 501, the first game (losing) after the pre-special effect is started is finished, the stop-time effect corresponding to the lose is executed, and the pre-special effect continues. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), in the first slot machine 501, the game that becomes the first game (small role winning) after the pre-special effect is started ends, and the stop corresponding to the small role winning is completed. The time special effect is executed and the pre-special effect continues. Further, in the eighth slot machine 501, the second game and the game effect are started after the advance special effect is started, and the advance special effect is continued.

  When a predetermined game period elapses from this state, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the first slot machine 501 starts a game that is the fifth game after the start of the special special effect, and the advance Special production continues. Also, in the eighth slot machine 501, the game (small role winning) that is the fifth game after the start of the special special effect is finished, the stop time effect corresponding to the small character winning is executed, and the special special The production continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the first slot machine 501, the game (losing) which is the fifth game after the start of the special special effect is finished, and the stop effect corresponding to the loss is executed. In addition, pre-special effects continue. On the other hand, in the eighth slot machine 501, the game and the game effect which are the sixth game are started after the advance special effect is started, and the advance special effect is ended as if the end condition of the advance special effect is satisfied.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), in the first slot machine 501, when the game (the ceiling counter is “0”) which is the sixth game after the start of the special special effect is started, the AT game The AT game finalizing effect (notifying effect) for notifying that is executed is executed, and the pre-special effect is continued. Further, in the eighth slot machine 501, the game (losing) which is the sixth game after the advance special effect is started is finished, and the stop effect corresponding to the loss is executed. Thereafter, when the seventh game (AT game) is started after the pre-special effect is started on the first slot machine 501, the pre-special effect is ended as if the pre-special effect end condition is satisfied. .

  In this manner, specific information (information that triggers an external device to input to the slot machine 501) such as information on the number of remaining games on the ceiling indicating that the AT game will be executed in six games from the predetermined slot machine 501 is provided. As a result of the output, when pre-special effect start information is simultaneously input to a plurality of slot machines 501 (1st to 8th units), a plurality of slot machines 501 (1st to 8th units) advance in advance. A special performance will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest (notify) in the plurality of slot machines 501 that the AT game is executed in any of the plurality of slot machines 501, and the player's expectation that the AT game will be executed is effective. Can be improved.

  Further, the start information of the advance special effect may be input only to the slot machine 501 that has output the specific information. Even in this case, the advance special effect is executed by the slot machine 501 that has output the specific information. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the AT game is executed in a manner different from the case where there is no input from the external device.

<Examples of special effects during changing slot machines>
With reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, description will be given of an effect example in which the changing special effect start information is simultaneously input to the plurality of slot machines 501 and the changing special effect is simultaneously executed.
It should be noted that the installation status of the slot machine 501 and the information input device is the same as the above-described example of the advance special effect of the slot machine, and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the 1st and 8th slot machines 501 are in a customer waiting state, and the LED display 520 performs a customer waiting light emission corresponding to the customer waiting state. At this time, the information input device provided corresponding to the input receiving device 523 of the 1st to 8th slot machines 501 is not operating.

  In this state, when a game (winning a small role and a special role) and a game effect are started in the first slot machine 501, a bonus game is executed from the external output terminal board of the first slot machine 501. Bonus internal winning information, that is, specific information that triggers an external device to input to the slot machine 501 is output.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the drive signals of the information input devices corresponding to the input receiving devices 523 of the first to eighth slot machines 501 are output from the external device that has received the specific information. The second actuator of the information input device is actuated, and the second input reception switch 523b of the input reception device 523 is pressed and turned on (the start information of the special effect during the change is input), the 1st to 8th slot machines A pre-special effect is started in each of 501, and the character information “CHANCE!” Is displayed on the LED display 520. Then, in the eighth slot machine 501, a game and a game effect are started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), in the first slot machine 501, the first game after the start of the special effect during the change is finished with the specific small role winning, and the specific small role winning is achieved. The stop-time effect corresponding to is executed, and the special effect during the change continues. Further, in the eighth slot machine 501, the first game after the start of the special effect during the change is finished with the small role winning, the stop time effect corresponding to the small role winning is executed, and is changing. Special production continues.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), in the 1st and 8th slot machines 501, the second game and the game effect are started after the changing special effect is started, and the changing special effect is started. The production continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the 1st and 8th slot machines 501, the second game after the start of the special effect during change ends, and when the stop corresponding to the loss occurs. While the production is executed, the special production continues during the fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (c), in the first slot machine 501, the third game is started after the special special effect during the change is started, and the bonus game is executed (the special role is won). A bonus confirmation effect (notification effect) is notified, and the changing special effect is continued. On the other hand, in the eighth slot machine 501, the third game and the game effect are started after the changing special effect is started, and the changing special effect is ended as if the end condition of the changing special effect is satisfied. To do. Thereafter, when the bonus game is started in the first slot machine, the changing special effect is ended as if the end condition of the changing special effect is satisfied.

  In this way, as a result of outputting specific information (information that triggers an external device to input to the slot machine 501) such as bonus internal winning information from a predetermined slot machine 501, a plurality of slot machines 501 (first unit) When the start information of the changing special effect is simultaneously input to the eighth to eighth units, the changing special effect is simultaneously executed by the plurality of slot machines 501 (first to eighth units). Therefore, it is possible to suggest (notice) that the bonus game is executed in any of the plurality of slot machines 501 in the plurality of slot machines 501, and the player's expectation that the bonus game will be executed is effective. Can be improved.

  Further, the start information of the changing special effect may be input only to the slot machine 501 that has output the specific information. Even in this case, the changing special effect is executed by the slot machine 501 that has output the specific information. Thus, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game is executed in a manner different from the case where there is no input from the external device.

<Example of slot machine error special production>
With reference to FIG. 59, description will be made on an effect example in the case where error special effect start information is simultaneously input to a plurality of slot machines 501 and error special effects are executed simultaneously.
Note that the installation status of the slot machine 501 and the information input device is the same as that of the example of the pre-read special effect of the slot machine described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, in the first slot machine 501, a game and a game effect are executed. Further, the eighth slot machine 501 is in the customer waiting state, and the LED display 520 performs the customer waiting light emission corresponding to the customer waiting state. At this time, the information input device provided corresponding to the input receiving device 523 of the 1st to 8th slot machines 501 is not operating.

  In this state, when the occurrence of a radio wave error is detected in the first slot machine 501, a radio wave error notification indicating that a radio wave error has occurred in the first slot machine 501 is started, and from the external output terminal plate. Error occurrence information indicating that a radio wave error has occurred, that is, specific information that triggers an input from the external device to the slot machine 501 is output.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the drive signals of the information input devices corresponding to the input receiving devices 523 of the first to eighth slot machines 501 are output from the external device that has received the specific information. Then, the third actuator of the information input device is actuated, and the third input reception switch 523c of the input reception device 523 is pressed and turned ON (the start information of the error special effect is input), the 1st to 8th slot machines 501 Each of the error special effects is started, and the character information of “error occurrence” (the error type is not displayed) is displayed on the LED display 520. At this time, in the eighth slot machine 501, a game and a game effect are started.

  When a predetermined time (in this case, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the error special effect, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), the end conditions for the error special effect are satisfied in the first to eighth slot machines 501. The special error production ends. In the first slot machine, the radio wave error notification is continued because the termination condition of the radio wave error notification has not yet been established.

  Thus, as a result of outputting specific result information (information that triggers an external device to input to the slot machine 501) such as radio wave error information and door opening error from a predetermined slot machine 501, a plurality of slots Error special effects are executed all at once on the machines 501 (1st to 8th). Therefore, it is possible to suggest (notify) in the plurality of slot machines 501 that there is a slot machine 501 in which an error has occurred, and to make it possible for a game hall employee to grasp that an error has occurred.

  Further, the error special effect start information may be input only to the slot machine 501 that has output the specific information. Even in this case, the error special effect is generated by the slot machine 501 that has output the specific information. Since it is executed, it is possible to communicate to the game hall employee that an error has occurred in a manner different from the case where there is no input from an external device.

  Furthermore, the special special effect, the changing special effect, and the error special effect are executed by the LED display 520 and the speaker 517, but at least one kind of the special special effect, the changing special effect, and the error special effect is provided. The presentation may be executed only by the LED display 520 without being executed by the speaker 517, or may be executed by the LED display 520, the speaker 517, and the liquid crystal display 509, or the LED display. The processing may be executed by the speaker 517 and the liquid crystal display 509 without being executed at 520.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the first terminal to the eighth terminal that outputs the normal game signal to the external terminal board, the ninth to eleventh terminals that output the special game signal are provided, and the information type signal, Although numerical information signals and timing signals are output, the present invention is not limited to this.

  FIG. 60 is a view showing a modification of the output form of special game information. This modification differs from the above embodiment in that the tenth and eleventh terminals are not provided on the external output terminal plate, and the special game information is output only from the ninth terminal.

  The special game information in this modification is output from the 9th terminal with bits 0 to 7 indicating stop bit, information type and numerical information, and stop bit as one frame, and start bit and data every 8 ms from the start of output. Bits 0 to 7 are changed to stop bits, and output of 8 bits (1 byte) is completed when 80 ms elapses.

  In this case, since a timing signal is not required, the number of output terminals for outputting special game information on the external output terminal board can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the game state information as special game information is output to the outside of the slot machine 501 together with the confirmation of the number of bets in each game, thereby grasping the game state for each game from the outside. Made it possible. However, since bonus games are the number of medals paid out, and RT games and AT games have the number of games as the end condition, the number of medals paid out in bonus games and the number of remaining games in RT games and AT games are displayed as special game information. It may be output to the outside of the slot machine 501.

  In the present embodiment, the effect related to the game is performed independently by the effect control unit 800 analyzing the command transmitted from the main control unit 610 and according to the analysis result. Of course, if the main control unit 610 transmits a command determined to the content of the effect to the effect control unit 800 and the effect control unit 800 faithfully performs the effect of the content instructed by the command, the main control unit The effect number indicating the content of the effect determined in 610 may be output to the outside of the slot machine 501 as special game information.

  In the present embodiment, the left, middle, and right reel stop operation position information is displayed when the stop switches 514a, 514b, and 514c are operated, and the left, middle, and right reels are displayed when the reels 510a, 510b, and 510c are actually stopped. The stop symbol information is output to the outside of the slot machine 501 as special game information. Of course, instead of or together with the left, middle and right reel stop operation position information, the number of sliding frames required until the reels 510a, 510b and 510c are stopped after the stop switches 514a, 514b and 514c are operated is shown. The sliding frame number information may be output to the outside of the slot machine 501 as special game information.

  In the present embodiment, there is no upper limit on the number of medals that a player can acquire in the slot machine 501, but for example, when the number of net increase medals after starting the slot machine 501 reaches a predetermined upper limit. Stop control (control that prevents the game from continuing unless a reset operation is performed by an employee of the game hall) may be performed. The stop control may be performed every time the big bonus ends. When the stop control is performed, the credit may be automatically settled. The stop information indicating that such stop control has been performed and the automatic payment information indicating that the credit has been automatically adjusted (done) may be output to the outside of the slot machine 501 as special game information. .

  In the present embodiment, a freeze determination random number is extracted in the freeze effect process, and if the value is a short winning value, the freeze state is controlled to a relatively short time, and if the value is a long winning value, the freeze state is a relatively long time. Had to be in control. In this way, instead of determining the type of the freeze state with one random number, it is first determined whether or not the first random number is extracted and controlled to the freeze state, and if the value indicates a predetermined winning value The second random number may be extracted to determine the type of freeze state. In this case, the freeze winning information indicating that the control to the freeze state is determined and the freeze type information indicating the type of the freeze state may be output to the outside of the slot machine 501 as special game information.

  In the present embodiment, an additional decision random number is extracted when controlled to the freeze state, and if the value is an additional winning value of 10 games, the additional number of AT games for 10 games is increased by the additional winning of 20 games. If it is a value, the number of AT games for 20 games is added. Instead of determining the number of AT games to be added with one random number in this way, first, it is determined whether or not to add an AT game by extracting the first random number, and that value is a predetermined winning value. For example, the number of games may be determined by extracting the second random number and adding it. In this case, the extra winning information indicating that the addition of the AT game has been determined and the extra game number information indicating the number of extra games may be output to the outside of the slot machine 501 as special game information.

  In the present embodiment, the AT game is terminated on the condition of the number of digest games, but may be terminated on the condition of the number of medals paid out. In this case, instead of the initial value of the number of AT games and the number of additional games, the number of payout medals as an end condition of the AT game and the number of additional medals to be added to the number of medals of the end condition are determined. It may be output to the outside of the slot machine 501 as game information.

  In this embodiment, the RT game (ART game) is started when the RT symbol is derived, but a bonus game (a part of them, for example, only a big bonus is also possible) It is good also as what is started by having ended. In this case, the bonus game may become an ART game after the end of the bonus game, and the bonus game may be started again by winning a bonus before the ART game (or RT game) ends.

  A bonus game played without straddling a normal game in this manner is called a bonus continuous game, and the number of bonus games played without straddling a normal game is called a continuous game number. The main control unit 610 (privilege granting means 670) counts the number of consecutive channels every time a bonus game is generated, and the information output means 750 uses the information indicating the number of consecutive channels as special game information. It may be output to the outside.

<Description of gaming system>
Next, the gaming system 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 which is a system configuration diagram of the gaming system 1000 according to the present embodiment.

  The game hall includes a hall computer 1100 (inside management device), an island computer 1200 (island management device), an information display device 1300 (calling lamp), a gaming device YS, a payment device 1400, a ball jet counter 1500, a medal jet counter 1600, In addition, a prize management device 1700 and the like are installed. In addition, the game hall includes a hall computer 1100 (inside management device), an island computer 1200 (island management device), an information display device 1300 (calling lamp), a checkout device 1400, a ball jet counter 1500, and a prize management device 1700. An internal network NT for exchanging information (data) between them is provided.

  The gaming device YS is discharged from the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 501), a lending device 1350 that performs processing for lending gaming media between the gaming machine, and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is composed of out tanks for counting game media, and is installed side by side on a plurality of game islands (island facilities) provided in the game hall. Various game information is output to the information display device 1300. In addition, it is good also as game device YS including the information display apparatus 1300 (calling lamp), and good also as game device YS not including an out tank. In the present embodiment, the information display device 1300 (calling lamp) may be referred to as an effect device.

  The medal jet counter 1600 is provided on a game island or the like, counts the medals acquired by the player with the slot machine 501, issues a recording medium (receipt or card) on which the counted medals are recorded, and counts the medals. The number is transmitted to the hall computer 1100 (in-house management apparatus) via the internal network NT.

  The ball jet counter 1500 is provided on a game island or the like, counts the game balls acquired by the player with the pachinko gaming machine 1, and issues a recording medium (receipt, card, etc.) on which the counted number of game balls is recorded. The counted number of game balls is transmitted to the hall computer 1100 (in-place management device) via the internal network NT.

  The settlement apparatus 1400 settles the balance (remaining amount) of the player's valuable value managed in association with the storage medium (card, coin, etc.) discharged from the lending apparatus 1350 when the player ends the game. Or payment information is transmitted to the prize management apparatus 1700 via the internal network NT.

  The information display device 1300 (calling lamp) is provided on the gaming island so as to correspond to each gaming device YS, and receives (collects) / aggregates (accumulates) various gaming information output from the corresponding gaming device YS. The received game information and the totalized (accumulated) game information are transmitted to the island computer 1200 (island management device) via the internal network NT. In addition, the received game information and the totaled game information are displayed, and an employee calling operation by the player is accepted.

  One island computer 1200 (island management device) is provided for each game island, and receives (collects) / aggregates (accumulates) and receives various game information transmitted from the information display device 1300 (calling lamp). The game information and the totalized (accumulated) game information are transmitted to the hall computer 1100 (in-place management apparatus) via the internal network NT.

  The hall computer 1100 (on-site management device) receives (collects) / aggregates (accumulates) various game information transmitted from the island computer 1200 (island management device), the ball jet counter 1500, the medal jet counter 1600, etc. The operating state of each gaming device YS is managed. Also, the game information that has been aggregated (accumulated) is displayed, and control is performed to cause the gaming machine to execute various special effects (such as pre-read special effects, advance special effects, changing special effects, error special effects, etc.). .

  In this embodiment, external devices such as a hall computer 1100 (on-site management device), an island computer 1200 (island management device), and an information display device 1300 (calling lamp) are collectively referred to as a gaming device (information collecting device). , Equipment device). In addition, the settlement apparatus 1400, the ball jet counter 1500, the medal jet counter 1600, the prize management apparatus 1700, and the like may be collectively referred to as an equipment apparatus.

<Control configuration of gaming device>
Next, a control configuration of the gaming apparatus will be described with reference to FIG. 62 which is a control block diagram of the gaming apparatus (here, the hall computer 1100, the island computer 1200, and the information display apparatus 1300) according to the present embodiment.

  The hall computer 1100 (site management device) includes an HC control unit 1101 that performs various control processes, an HC input unit 1102 that receives input of various signals, an HC output unit 1103 that outputs various signals, and a gaming device YS. A hard disk 1104 (HDD) for storing collected data collected from the HC and an HC communication unit 1105 for communicating with external devices.

  The HC control unit 1101 includes a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a control program, a RAM that is used as a work area, and the like. Various processes are performed while being used.

  The HC input unit 1102 is configured to pass a signal input from the HC input device 1110 for an operation input by a game hall employee to the HC control unit 1101. The HC input device 1110 is, for example, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, or the like.

  The HC output unit 1103 has various functions such as an HC display 1111 for displaying various information, an HC speaker 1112 for outputting various sounds, and an HC printer 1113 for printing (printing out) various information. A signal is output. The HC display device 1111 is, for example, a liquid crystal display or an EL display.

  The HC communication unit 1105 performs communication between the hall computer 1100 (in-site management apparatus) and devices on the network by performing data communication according to a predetermined communication protocol. Specifically, it is connected to an island computer 1200 (island management device), a settlement device 1400, a ball jet counter 1500, a medal jet counter 1600, and a prize management device 1700. It should be noted that, with the island computer 1200 (island management device), collected data (game information) collected from the gaming device YS, special effect execution information for instructing the game machine to execute a special effect, Transmission / reception of effect information for causing the device 1250 to execute a predetermined effect is performed.

  The island computer 1200 (island management device) includes an SC control unit 1201 that performs various control processes, an SC input unit 1202 that receives input of various signals, an SC output unit 1203 that outputs various signals, and an external device. SC communication unit 1204 for performing communication between the two.

  The SC control unit 1201 includes a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a control program, a RAM that is used as a work area, and the like. Various processes are performed while being used.

  The SC input unit 1202 delivers a signal input from the SC input device 1210 for an operation input by a game hall employee to the SC control unit 1201. The SC input device 1210 is, for example, various switches or a remote control device.

  The SC output unit 1203 outputs a drive signal to the information input device 1212 provided corresponding to each gaming device YS, and various signals to the effect display device 1251 and the effect speaker 1252 constituting the effect device 1250. Is output. The effect display device 1251 is, for example, a liquid crystal display or an EL display.

  The SC communication unit 1204 controls data communication between the island computer 1200 (island management device) and devices on the network by performing data communication according to a predetermined communication protocol. Specifically, it is connected to a hall computer 1100 (in-house management device) and an information display device 1300 (calling lamp). Note that the collected data (game information) collected from the gaming device YS and the above-described special effect execution information and effect information are transmitted and received between the hall computer 1100 (island management device) and the information display device 1300 (calling lamp). .

  The information display device 1300 (calling lamp) includes a TC control unit 1301 that performs various control processes, a TC input unit 1302 that receives input of various signals, a TC output unit 1303 that outputs various signals, an external device, For example, a TC communication unit 1304 for performing communication.

  The TC control unit 1301 includes a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a control program, a RAM that is used as a work area, and the like. Various processes are performed while being used.

  The TC input unit 1302 is configured to pass a signal input from the TC input device 1310 for an operation input by an employee or player of the game hall to the TC control unit 1301. The TC input device 1310 is, for example, various switches or a remote control device.

  The TC output unit 1303 outputs various signals to a TC display device 1311 for displaying various types of information, a TC speaker 1312 for outputting various types of audio, and a TC light emitting unit 1313 that emits light in a predetermined manner. It has become. The TC display device 1311 is, for example, a liquid crystal display or an EL display.

  The TC communication unit 1304 performs communication between the information display apparatus 1300 (calling lamp) and devices on the network by performing data communication according to a predetermined communication protocol. Specifically, it is connected to an island computer 1200 (island management device). Note that the collected data (game information) collected from the gaming device YS is transmitted to and received from the island computer 1200 (island management device).

<Functional configuration of gaming system>
Next, the functional configuration of the gaming system 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 63 which is a functional block diagram of the gaming system 1000 according to the present embodiment.

  The gaming system 1000 includes a gaming machine information setting means 1010 for setting information related to gaming machines YS (pachinko gaming machines 1, slot machines 501, lending devices 1350) installed on gaming islands, and employees of gaming machines YS and game halls. Information receiving means 1020 for receiving information (game information, operation input) from a member or a player, information management means 1030 for managing information received by the information receiving means 1020, and causing the gaming apparatus YS to execute a special effect Special effect control means 1040 for performing control is provided.

  The gaming machine information setting means 1010 includes setting information setting means 1011 for setting setting information such as an environment in which gaming machines (pachinko gaming machines 1 and slot machines 501) are installed based on operations by employees of the game hall, etc. Based on group classification means 1012 for classifying a plurality of gaming machines installed on a plurality of game islands into one of a plurality of groups based on operation by a game hall employee, etc., and operation input by a game hall employee, etc. Model information setting means 1013 for setting information such as the type and model name of each gaming machine.

  The information receiving unit 1020 includes an information receiving unit 1021 that receives game information output from the gaming device YS, and game information that needs to be accumulated among the game information received by the information receiving unit 1021 (for example, jackpot number, bonus number) Reception information accumulation means 1022 for accumulating the number of consumption media (IN), the number of payout media (OUT), etc., and cumulative information display means 1023 for displaying information accumulated by the reception information accumulation means 1022 on the TC display device 1311; Based on the operation of the TC input device 1310 by the player, the TC light emitting unit 1313 and the light emitting unit of the island facility are caused to emit light, thereby providing employee calling means 1024 for calling an employee of the game hall.

  The information management means 1030 collects information such as game information received by the information receiving means 1021, accumulated game information accumulated by the received information accumulating means 1022, count information of equipment devices (ball jet counter 1500, medal jet counter 1600), and the like. Means 1031, collected information totaling means 1032 for collecting various information collected by the information collecting means 1031, and HC display by specifying the status of the gaming device YS, equipment, etc. from the various information collected by the information collecting means 1031 In-store status display means to be displayed on the device 1111, aggregated data display means to display the information aggregated by the collection information aggregation means 1032 on the HC display device 1111, information collected by the information collection means 1031 and collection information aggregation means 1032 to aggregate A form is created based on the information obtained and the HC display device 11 And a form creation unit 1035 and outputs from the HC printer can be displayed on 1.

  The special effect control means 1040 is collected by the special effect setting means 1041 for setting the execution date and execution period of the special effect and the type of the special effect to be executed, and the information collecting means 1031 based on the operation of the game hall employee. Specific information reception determination means 1042 for determining whether or not the information includes specific information indicating that an advantageous state (a jackpot game, a probable game state, a bonus game, an A (R) T game, etc.) is executed; A game period specifying means 1043 for specifying a game period (the number of times of variable display, the number of games, etc.) until the state is executed, and a special effect is executed on the gaming device YS according to the game period specified by the game period specifying means 1043 Whether or not to perform the special effect execution determining means 1044 for determining the type of special effect to be executed, and the determination result of the special effect execution determining means 1044 The information input device 1212 provided corresponding to the Re respectively and an information input device driving unit 1045 for driving (operation).

<Hall computer menu processing>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing menu processing executed in the hall computer 1100 (in-place management apparatus). This menu processing is performed by superimposing a plurality of menu pages on the HC display device 1111 based on selection of a menu button displayed on the HC display device 1111 by an employee of the game hall (such as clicking a menu icon). The displayed menu screen is displayed, and processing corresponding to the menu page (menu item) selected by the game hall employee from the plurality of menu pages is executed.

  The menu page is installed on the gaming machine information setting page for setting information related to gaming machines installed in the gaming hall, the in-store status page for checking the status of various devices installed in the gaming hall, and on the gaming hall. Total data page for generating and displaying aggregate data from information collected from various devices, and forms for creating and printing out forms from information collected from various devices installed at the amusement hall There are a creation page, a special effect setting page for setting information regarding various special effects to be executed by the gaming machine (see FIG. 65), and the like.

  First, in step H101, it is determined whether or not a menu item selection operation (switching operation) has been performed. If there is no menu item selection operation (switching operation) (H101: NO), the process proceeds to step H103. On the other hand, if there is a menu item selection operation (switching operation) (H101: YES), a menu page corresponding to the selected menu item is displayed on the HC display device 1111 in step H102.

  Next, in step H103, it is determined whether or not a gaming machine information setting page which is one of the menu items is being displayed. If the gaming machine information setting page is not being displayed (H103: NO), the process proceeds to step H105. On the other hand, when the gaming machine information setting page is being displayed (H103: YES), in step H104, information related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine 501 (rotational gaming machine) installed in the game hall is set. Game machine information setting process for this, and this menu process is completed.

  In this gaming machine information setting process, based on an operation input from a game hall employee, the gaming machine machine number, identification information of the island computer 1200 (island management device) placed in the island facility where the gaming machine is installed. Island Con ID, island number that is the number of the island facility where the gaming machine is installed, group type indicating which gaming machine is classified into a plurality of groups, type indicating the type of gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or slot machine 501), a model name indicating the model of the gaming machine, and the like are set.

  Next, in step H105, it is determined whether or not the in-store status page, which is one of the menu items, is being displayed. If the in-store status page is not being displayed (H105: NO), the process proceeds to step H107. On the other hand, when the in-store status page is being displayed (H105: YES), in step H106, the pachinko gaming machine 1, the slot machine 501, and various equipment devices (lending device 1350, checkout device 1400, In-store status display processing for updating the current status of the ball jet counter 1500, medal jet counter 1600, etc.) or displaying the updated status is performed, and the current menu processing is terminated.

  Next, in step H107, it is determined whether or not the total data page that is one of the menu items is being displayed. If the total data page is not being displayed (H107: NO), the process proceeds to step H109. On the other hand, when the total data page is being displayed (H107: YES), in step H108, a plurality of game information collected from the gaming device YS and various equipment devices is totaled to generate or generate total data. Aggregated data display processing for displaying the aggregated data is performed, and the current menu processing is terminated.

  Next, in step H109, it is determined whether or not a form creation page that is one of the menu items is being displayed. If the form creation page is not being displayed (H109: NO), the process proceeds to step H111. On the other hand, if the form creation page is being displayed (H109: YES), in step H110, a form is created from a plurality of game information collected from the gaming device YS and various equipment devices, and the created form is displayed. A form creation process for printing out is performed, and the current menu process is terminated.

  Next, in step H111, it is determined whether or not a special effect setting page that is one of the menu items is being displayed. If the special effect setting page is not being displayed (H111: NO), the current menu processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the special effect setting page is being displayed (H111: YES), in step H112, a special effect setting process for setting information of a special effect to be executed by the gaming machine is performed, and this menu process is performed. finish.

  A special effect executed on a gaming machine is an advance notice that suggests that an advantageous state (a jackpot game, a probable gaming state, a bonus game, an AT game) advantageous to the player may be executed on the gaming machine. System special effects and error special effects for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred in the gaming machine.

  For the notice-type special effects, “pre-read special effects” and “pre-advance effects” that are executed over a predetermined period (a plurality of variable displays) are executed over a shorter period than the pre-read special effects and the advance special effects. The “variable special effects” that are easy to change are included, and the error special effects include “error special effects” that are executed over a predetermined period.

  In this special effect setting process, the execution date for executing the special effect, the execution period for executing the special effect on the execution date of the special effect, the presence / absence of the execution of the special notice effect, the type of the special notice effect to be executed, the error special Processing for setting the production settings such as the presence / absence of production and the type of error to be notified to a plurality of groups at once or for each group is performed.

<Amusement machine information setting page>
With reference to FIG. 65, the gaming machine information setting page located at the forefront of the menu screen displayed on the HC display device 1111 during execution of the gaming machine information setting process described above will be described. FIG. 65A shows the display of the first page of the gaming machine information setting page, and FIG. 65B shows the display of the second page of the gaming machine information setting page.

  In the gaming machine information setting page, the island number ID field in which the island number ID for identifying the island computer 1200 (island management device) provided on the gaming island and the number field in which the gaming machine number is recorded is recorded. An island number field in which an island number, which is a number of a gaming island in which a gaming machine is installed, is recorded; a group type field in which a group to which the gaming machine belongs is recorded; and a type of gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, Corresponds to the type field in which the slot machine 501) is recorded, the model name field in which the model name of the gaming machine is recorded, and the input I / F field in which the input acceptance interface (configuration of the input acceptance device) of the gaming machine is recorded The attached records are displayed side by side in the vertical direction.

  When setting gaming machine information from the gaming machine information setting page, an employee of the game hall uses the HC input device 1110 such as a mouse or a keyboard to update information recorded in each field of each record. The machine information is set.

  For example, when setting the island control ID, the island control ID field of the machine number to be set is clicked with the mouse, the ID is input from the keyboard, and the ID is set when the completion icon is clicked. Note that the island computer 1200 may be automatically set by notifying the hall computer 1100 of the ID of the island computer 1200 by operating the island computer 1200.

  When setting an island number, click the island number field of the machine number to be set with the mouse, enter the island number from the keyboard, and click the completion icon to set the island number. A plurality of island numbers may be registered in the pull-down list in advance, and may be selected from the pull-down list displayed when the island number field is clicked.

  When setting the group type, select the group type from the pull-down list (multiple group types are registered) displayed by clicking the down arrow icon of the group type field of the machine number you want to set with the mouse. Select and click the completion icon to set the group type. The group type may be input from the keyboard. Further, a group in which different types of pachinko gaming machines 1 and slot machines 501 are mixed may be set, or a group in which pachinko gaming machines 1 and slot machines 501 are mixed may be set.

  Also, when setting the type of gaming machine, select the type from the pull-down list (multiple types are registered) displayed by clicking the down arrow icon of the type field of the machine number you want to set with the mouse When the completion icon is clicked, the type of gaming machine is set. The group type may be input from the keyboard.

  When setting the model name of the gaming machine, the model name field of the machine number to be set is clicked with the mouse, the model name is input from the keyboard, and the island number is set when the completion icon is clicked. A plurality of model names may be registered in the pull-down list in advance, and may be selected from the pull-down list that is displayed when the model name field is clicked.

  Also, when setting an input acceptance interface for a gaming machine, an input that causes each special effect to be executed in the corresponding gaming machine from the keyboard by clicking the input acceptance I / F field of the machine number to be set with the mouse. Types of reception interfaces (an input reception switch for executing a special special effect, an input reception switch for executing a special effect during change, and an input reception switch for executing an error special effect) (first input reception) Switch to the third input reception switch) and clicking the completion icon sets the input reception interface. Note that the type, setting pattern, and the like of the input reception interface may be registered in advance in the pull-down list so that they can be selected from the pull-down list that is displayed when the input reception I / F field is clicked. Further, instead of setting the type of the input reception interface, the type of actuator (first actuator to third actuator) of the information input device 1212 for each special effect and the drive pattern of the actuator may be set.

  In addition, when setting the gaming machine information on another page of the gaming machine information setting page, click the previous icon to return to the previous page or the next icon to advance to the next page, and perform the above-described setting operation on the displayed page. It is like that.

  The gaming machine information setting set in this way is referred to by the hall computer 1100 (in-place management device), and whether or not execution conditions for linking game information collected from the gaming device YS and various special effects are satisfied. It will be used for judgment.

<Special production setting page>
With reference to FIG. 66, the special effect setting page located at the forefront of the menu screen displayed on HC display device 1111 during execution of the special effect setting process described above will be described. FIG. 66A shows a display example in the case where the effect settings are collectively set in a plurality of groups on the special effect setting page. FIG. 66B shows the effect settings for each group on the special effect setting page. This is a display example when setting.

  On the special effect setting page, as a setting type, a batch setting item for setting special effects for the group to which the gaming machine belongs, and a group for setting the special effect for each group to which the gaming machine belongs. Setting items are arranged above and below.

  The batch setting item and the setting item for each group include an execution date field in which the execution date for executing the special effect is recorded, an execution period field in which the execution period for executing the special effect in the execution date is recorded, and a notice system The presence / absence of execution of special effects and the type of notice-related special effects to be executed (pre-special effects including pre-read special effects, special effects during change) are recorded, An error-related special effect field in which the type of error (important error, all errors) to be notified is recorded is displayed. In addition, in the setting item for each group, the group column for the amount set on the gaming machine information setting page is displayed, and the above-described various fields are displayed for each group column.

  When setting special production information from the special production setting page, the game site employee uses the HC input device 1110 such as a mouse or a keyboard to update the information recorded in each field of each record. Production information is set.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the check box on the left side of the collective setting item is clicked with the mouse, various fields of the collective setting item are validated and special effects can be set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the check box on the left side of the setting item for each group is clicked with the mouse, various fields of the setting item for each group are validated, and special effects can be set. Become.

  For example, when setting the execution date for special effects, a pull-down list displayed by clicking the down arrow icon of the execution date field with the mouse (daily, holiday only, weekday only, non-execution are registered as options) The execution date of the special effect is set by clicking the completion icon and selecting the execution date.

  In addition, when setting the execution period of special effects on the execution day, a pull-down list displayed by clicking the down arrow icon of the execution period field with the mouse (all day, morning only, afternoon only, 1 after opening the store) Time, 1 hour before closing is registered), and when the completion icon is clicked, the execution period of special effects is set.

  In addition, when setting a notice-type special effect, a pull-down list displayed by clicking the down arrow icon of the notice-type special effect field with the mouse (only in advance (special effect) as an option, changing (special effect)) If the execution information of the notice-type special effect is selected from the list of “only, both are registered and no both” is registered, and the completion icon is clicked, the execution information of the notice-type special effect is set.

  Also, when setting an error special effect, a pull-down list displayed by clicking the down arrow icon of the error special effect field with the mouse (only important errors, all errors, no errors are registered as options) The execution information of the error special effect is set by selecting the execution information of the error special effect and clicking the completion icon.

  When the special effect setting set in this way is referred to by the hall computer 1100 (in-place management apparatus) and it is determined that the execution condition for the special effect is satisfied, the gaming apparatus YS for which the execution condition for the special effect is satisfied belongs. Special effect execution information for operating the information input device 1212 is transmitted to the island computer 1200 that manages the gaming devices YS of the group.

  In at least one of the batch setting item and the group-specific setting item, the execution date and execution period of special effects, the settings of special notice effects and error special effects are changed every predetermined period (month, week). A scheduling function such as that set in the above may be provided. For example, it may be possible to set a schedule so that the special effect is executed throughout the day in the first week, but the special effect is executed only in the morning in the second week.

<Special effect processing 1 of hall computer>
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the special effect process 1 executed in the hall computer 1100. This special effect process 1 is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 ms) in the timer interrupt process of the hall computer 1100, for example, and information indicating that an advantageous state is executed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (scheduled special figure scheduled stop) Special games when special game information such as symbol information, special figure scheduled variation pattern information, special figure stop symbol information, special diagram variation pattern information) or information indicating that an error has occurred (error occurrence information) is received (collected) A process of transmitting special effect execution information for driving (actuating) the information input device 1212 is executed to the island computer 1200 that manages the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the group to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has output the information belongs. Is done.

  First, in step H201, it is determined whether or not there is a group to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 belongs in the group type set in the gaming machine information setting process in step H104 described above. If there is no group to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 belongs (H201: NO), the special effect process 1 of this time is ended. On the other hand, if there is a group to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 belongs (H201: YES), the process proceeds to step H202.

  Next, in step H202, it is determined whether the first special figure reservation number information or the second special figure reservation number information has been received. If the first special figure reservation number information or the second special figure reservation number information has not been received (H202: NO), the process proceeds to step H204. On the other hand, when the first special figure hold number information or the second special figure hold number information is received (H202: YES), in step H203, for pachinko machines for managing the game progress information in each pachinko gaming machine 1 A record corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special figure hold number information is searched from the progress data (see FIG. 68), and the hold number information (holding number information corresponding to the transmission source game machine) of the record is obtained. Update. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the special figure reservation number information of each pachinko gaming machine 1. Details of the pachinko progress data will be described later.

  Next, in step H204, it is determined whether or not special figure scheduled stop symbol information has been received. If the special figure scheduled stop symbol information has not been received (H204: NO), the process proceeds to step H206. On the other hand, if special figure scheduled stop symbol information is received (H204: YES), in step H205, a record corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the special figure scheduled stop symbol information is searched from the pachinko progress data. Then, the hold fluctuation information corresponding to the special figure hold number of the record (hold change information corresponding to the transmission source game machine) is updated. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the result of the variation display of the special symbol scheduled to be executed (hit and lose) by holding each special figure of each pachinko gaming machine.

  Next, in step H206, it is determined whether or not special figure scheduled variation pattern information has been received. If the special figure scheduled variation pattern information has not been received (H206: NO), the process proceeds to step H211. On the other hand, when the special figure scheduled variation pattern information is received (H206: YES), in step H207, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special figure scheduled variation pattern information from the pachinko progress data (see FIG. 68). The record corresponding to is retrieved, and the hold fluctuation information (hold change information corresponding to the transmission source game machine) corresponding to the special figure hold number of the record is updated. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol scheduled to be executed by holding each special diagram of each pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, in step H208, from the previous special effect (in this case, the pre-reading special effect and the changing special effect are targeted) of the group (corresponding group) to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special figure scheduled variation pattern information belongs With reference to the elapsed time, it is determined in step H209 whether or not the elapsed time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). If the elapsed time is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (H209: NO), the process proceeds to step H211. On the other hand, when the elapsed time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (H209: YES), in step H210, a pre-reading special effect determination table for pachinko for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading special effect (see FIG. 69 (a)). ) Is selected, and the process proceeds to step H220. Details of the prefetch special effect determination table for pachinko will be described later.

  Next, in step H211, it is determined whether or not special figure stop symbol information has been received. If the special figure stop symbol information has not been received (H211: NO), the process proceeds to step H213. On the other hand, when the special figure stop symbol information is received (H2011: YES), in step H212, a record corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the source of the special figure stop symbol information is searched from the pachinko progress data. Then, the fluctuation information (the fluctuation information corresponding to the transmission source game machine) of the record is updated. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed in each pachinko gaming machine 1 (big hit, lost).

  Next, in step H213, it is determined whether or not special figure variation pattern information has been received. If special figure variation pattern information has not been received (step H213: NO), the process proceeds to step H218. On the other hand, if special figure variation pattern information is received (H213: YES), in step H214, a record corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the source of the special figure variation pattern information is searched from the pachinko progress data. Then, the fluctuation information (the fluctuation information corresponding to the transmission source game machine) of the record is updated. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol being executed in each pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, in step H215, the progress from the previous special effect (in this case, the pre-reading special effect and the changing special effect are targeted) of the group (corresponding group) to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special figure variation pattern information belongs With reference to the time, in step H216, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). If the elapsed time is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (H216: NO), the process proceeds to step H218. On the other hand, if the elapsed time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (H216: YES), in step H217, the changing special effect determination table for pachinko to determine whether or not to execute the changing special effect is selected (FIG. 69). (See (b)), and the process proceeds to Step H220. Details of the changing special effect determination table for pachinko will be described later.

  Next, in step H218, it is determined whether error occurrence information has been received. When the error occurrence information is not received (H218: NO), the special effect process 1 of this time is ended. On the other hand, if error occurrence information has been received (H218: YES), in step H219, a pachinko error special effect determination table (see FIG. 69 (c)) for determining whether or not to execute the error special effect. Select and move the process to Step H220. Details of the error special effect determination table for pachinko will be described later.

  Next, in step H220, special effect settings (special effect execution date, special effect execution period, special effect settings, etc.) and pachinko are set in the special effect determination table selected in any of steps H210, H217, and H219. Matching the game progress information stored in the progress data for the game (holding fluctuation information of the source gaming machine, the fluctuation information, holding fluctuation information of other gaming machines in the group, etc.) Whether or not to execute (prefetch special effect, changing special effect, error special effect) is determined.

  Next, in step H221, it is determined whether or not to execute a special effect as the determination result in step H220. When the special effect is not executed (H221: NO), the current special effect process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, when executing the special effect (H221: YES), in step H222, the game of the group (corresponding group) to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special game information that triggered the execution of the special effect belongs. Special effect execution information indicating the type of group that executes special effects, the type of special effects, and the type of input reception interface (input reception switch) that performs input is transmitted to the island computer 1200 (island management device) that manages the machine To do. Thereby, the information input device 1212 corresponding to each pachinko gaming machine 1 of the group to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special gaming information belongs is operated by the island computer 1200 (island management device) that has received the special performance execution information. The special effect is executed by performing the process for making it happen.

  Next, in step H223, it is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the prefetch special effect or the changing special effect. If it is not determined to be executed (H223: NO), the current special effect process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be executed (H223: YES), in step H224, the current time is stored as the special effect time in the RAM of the HC control unit 1101, and the special effect process 1 of this time is terminated.

  In this way, when the elapsed time from the previous special effect (pre-read special effect, changing special effect) is not longer than the predetermined time (10 minutes), the special effect is not executed. It is possible to prevent the special effects (pre-reading special effects, changing special effects) from being reduced. It becomes.

  Also, when receiving error occurrence information, the error special effect that should be executed first is not executed because the error special effect is executed regardless of the elapsed time from the previous special effect. This can be avoided and the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

<Progress data for pachinko>
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the contents of the pachinko progress data stored in the hard disk 1104 (HDD) of the hall computer 1100 (in-house management device).

  Pachinko progress data is data for managing game progress information in each pachinko gaming machine 1, and records corresponding to each of the pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in the game hall are set in each record. Has multiple data fields.

  In the plurality of data fields, a machine number field in which a machine number for identifying the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game hall is set, and a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state, probability changing gaming state) Game state field to be stored, special figure type field in which the type of special symbol is set, special figure hold number field in which the number of first special figure hold and second special figure hold is stored, variation of special symbol being executed The fluctuation field in which the fluctuation information indicating the content of the display (result, fluctuation pattern) is stored, the hold information field in which the hold fluctuation information indicating the contents of the fluctuation display of the special symbol scheduled to be executed by each special figure hold is stored It is included.

In the special figure hold number field, a special figure type indicating a special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) and a special figure hold number corresponding to the special figure type are set.
The hold information field includes first hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold, second hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold, and third hold information corresponding to the third special figure hold. Fourth hold information corresponding to the fourth special figure hold is set.

<Update example of progress data for pachinko>
Here, an example will be described in which the record of the pachinko progress data is updated when the hall computer 1100 (in-place management apparatus) receives (collects) various game information output from the pachinko gaming machine. Here, it is assumed that game information is output from the second pachinko machine.

When the game state information indicating the normal game state is received, the game state in the game state field of the corresponding record is updated to “normal (normal game state)”.
When the first special figure hold number information indicating that the first special figure hold number is 4 is received, the special figure hold number of the first special symbol in the special figure hold number field of the corresponding record is updated to “4”. Is done.
When the second special figure hold number information indicating that the second special figure hold number is 0 is received, the special figure hold number of the second special symbol in the special figure hold number field of the corresponding record is updated to “0”. Is done.

When the special figure stop symbol information indicating the loss is received, the result of the fluctuation information in the fluctuation field of the corresponding record is updated to “lost”.
When special figure fluctuation pattern information indicating fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, long reach fluctuation, etc.) less than super reach (S reach) is received, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation information in the fluctuation field of the corresponding record is obtained. Updated to “Less than S Reach”.

When the special figure scheduled stop symbol information indicating a loss is received in the state where the first special figure hold number is “1”, the result of the first hold information in the hold information field of the corresponding record is updated to “lost”.
When the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern information indicating the fluctuation pattern less than super reach is received in the state where the first special figure hold number is “1”, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the first hold information in the hold information field of the corresponding record is “ Updated to "Less than S Reach".

When the special figure scheduled stop symbol information indicating a big hit is received in the state where the first special figure hold number is “4”, the result of the fourth hold information in the hold information field of the corresponding record is updated to “big hit”.
When the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern information indicating super reach or higher (super reach, special reach, full rotation reach, etc.) is received in the state where the first special figure hold number is “4”, the fourth hold information field of the corresponding record The special figure fluctuation pattern of the hold information is updated to “S reach or more”.

  In this way, the pachinko progress data stored in the hard disk 1104 (HDD) of the hall computer 1100 (on-site management device) is stored in a record in real time every time game information is received (collected) from the pachinko gaming machine. The information that has been updated. Therefore, the hall computer 1100 can grasp game progress information in each pachinko gaming machine by referring to the pachinko progress data.

<Pre-fetch special performance judgment table for pachinko>
FIG. 69A is a diagram showing an example of a prefetch special effect determination table for pachinko for determining whether or not to perform a prefetch special effect based on the hold variation information, and is referred to in the special effect process 1 described above. The

  In the pre-read special effect determination table for pachinko, the execution date of the special effect, the execution period of the special effect on the execution date, the current game state of the pachinko machine 1 that is the source of the special game information, and the source of the special game information Pachinko gaming machine 1 to be the latest pending fluctuation information, pachinko gaming machine 1 from which the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the source of the special gaming information is sent, the pending fluctuation information of the other pachinko gaming machines 1 to which the group belongs, notice-based special effects (here special advance effects) ), The distribution ratio of the determination result, and the determination result (whether or not to execute, the type of special effect to be executed) are associated with each other.

  According to the look-ahead special effect determination table for pachinko machines, the look-ahead special effect is executed on the date and time according to the execution date of the special effect and the execution period of the special effect on the execution date set by the game hall employees. become. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to execute a prefetch special effect at the date and time that is in accordance with the intention of the game hall.

  Further, according to the pre-reading special effect determination table for pachinko, the pre-reading special effect can be executed when the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine that is the transmission source of the special gaming information is the normal gaming state. However, the pre-reading special effect cannot be executed in the case of the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state. By doing so, the frequency of execution of the prefetch special effect is not increased, and the expectation for the prefetch special effect is not impaired, and the player's expectation for executing the jackpot game is improved. It becomes possible.

  In addition, according to the prefetch special effect determination table for pachinko, it is possible to execute the prefetch special effect when the latest pending variation information of the pachinko machine that is the transmission source of the special game information is a big hit, In the case of losing, the pre-reading special effect cannot be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game is executed when the prefetch special effect is executed, and to improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game is executed. It becomes possible.

  Further, according to the look-ahead special effect determination table for pachinko, specific information (super reach lose, special) is included in the hold variation information of other pachinko gaming machines 1 to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the special gaming information is transmitted belongs. The pre-reading special effect can be executed when the information on reach lose or jackpot is included. By doing in this way, when the pachinko gaming machine that performs the prefetching effect is included in the group, the pachinko gaming machine in which the jackpot game is executed at the time when the prefetching special effect is performed is preempted. This can be prevented, and it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-reading special effect.

  In addition, according to the pre-read special effect determination table for pachinko, the special reach is more than in the case where there is a super reach in the hold variation information of other pachinko gaming machines 1 to which the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the special gaming information is transmitted belongs. The pre-reading special effect is executed at a higher rate when there is, and the pre-reading special effect is executed at a higher rate when there is a big hit than when there is a special reach. In this way, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the prefetch special effect.

  In addition, when the number of operating groups of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the special gaming information is transmitted is less than a predetermined number (for example, four), the group of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the special gaming information is transmitted A pre-reading special effect is executed regardless of the hold variation information of other pachinko gaming machines 1, and when the number of operating machines is a predetermined number (four or more), the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the special gaming information If specific information is included in the hold variation information of other pachinko gaming machines 1 to which the group 1 belongs, the prefetch special effect may be executable. In this way, even if the number of operating units is small, the prefetch special effect is executed at a certain frequency, and it is possible to improve the interest of the prefetch special effect.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the source of the special game information, if the number of variable displays (game period) until the jackpot game is executed is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), a relatively short execution Special effect execution information for instructing execution of a pre-reading special effect for time is transmitted. When the number of times is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, special effect execution information for instructing execution of a pre-read special effect for a relatively long execution time is transmitted. You may make it do. If it does in this way, the prefetch special effect of the length suitable for the number of times of change display (game period) until a jackpot game is performed can be performed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a prefetch special effect. .

  Further, the prefetch special effect may be executed at a higher rate in the case where the hold variation information is the probable big hit than in the case where the hold change information is a normal big win. In this way, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the prefetch special effect. Further, when the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special gaming information is a probability-changing gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, the pre-reading special effect cannot be performed. If the game state is at least one of them, the prefetch special effect may be executable. In addition, when the latest pending fluctuation information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special game information is lost, the prefetch special effect cannot be executed, but a lower rate (for example, 1%) than the case of the jackpot Thus, it may be possible to execute a special look-ahead effect of Gasse.

<Pachinko's changing special performance judgment table>
FIG. 69B is a diagram showing an example of the changing special effect determination table for pachinko for determining whether or not to execute the changing special effect based on the change information. In the special effect process 1 described above, FIG. Referenced.

  In the changing special effect determination table for pachinko, the execution date of the special effect, the execution period of the special effect on the execution date, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the source of the special game information, and the transmission of the special game information Latest change information of the original pachinko machine 1, setting of notice special effects (here, special effects during change), determination result distribution ratio, determination results (whether or not to execute, types of special effects to be executed) Are associated.

  According to the changing special effect determination table for pachinko, the changing special effect is executed at the date and time according to the execution date of the special effect and the execution period of the special effect on the execution date set by the employees of the game hall. Will be. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the changing special effect at the date and time that suits the amusement hall.

  According to the changing special effect determination table for pachinko, the changing special effect can be executed when the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special gaming information is the normal gaming state. However, in the case of a probabilistic gaming state or a short-time gaming state, it is impossible to execute the special effect during the fluctuation. By doing this, the execution frequency of the special effect during the change is not increased, and the expectation for the special effect during the change is not impaired, and the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is reduced. It becomes possible to improve.

  Further, according to the changing special effect determination table for pachinko, the changing special effect can be executed when the latest change information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special game information is a big hit. However, in the case of losing, it is impossible to execute special effects during fluctuation. By doing this, it is possible to make the player recognize that a jackpot game will be executed when the special effect during fluctuation is executed, and to improve the player's expectation for the jackpot game being executed. Is possible.

  Further, according to the changing special effect determination table for pachinko, the latest change information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special game information is a big hit with super reach than the case where the latest change information is a big hit with long reach or less. The special effect during the change is executed at a higher rate in the case, and the special effect during the change is executed at a higher rate in the case of the big win in the special reach than in the case of the big win in the super reach . By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the changing special effect.

  Note that the special effects during change may be executed at a higher rate when the change information is a probable big hit than when the change information is a normal big win. If it does in this way, it will become possible to improve a player's expectation with respect to the special effect during change effectively. Furthermore, when the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special gaming information is a probability variation gaming state or a short-time gaming state, the changing special effect is not executable. If it is at least one of the short-time gaming state, the changing special effect may be executable. If the latest variation information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special game information is lost, the special effect during the variation is impossible to execute, but at a lower rate (for example, 1%) than the case of the jackpot , Special effects may be executed while the gas is changing.

<Error special performance judgment table for pachinko>
FIG. 69C is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko error special effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute an error special effect based on the error occurrence information, and is referred to in the special effect process 1 described above. The

  In the error special performance determination table for pachinko, the execution date of the special performance, the execution period of the special performance on the execution date, the setting of the error-related special performance, the error that occurred in the pachinko machine 1 that is the transmission source of the special game information Types and determination results (whether or not execution is performed and types of special effects to be performed) are associated with each other.

  According to the error special effect determination table for pachinko, the error special effect is executed on the date and time according to the execution date of the special effect and the execution period of the special effect on the execution date set by the employees of the game hall. become. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform an error special effect at the date and time that is in accordance with the intention of the game hall.

  In addition, according to the error special performance determination table for pachinko, when only an important error is set by an amusement hall employee, an error special performance is executed when an error other than a right-handed error occurs, and all errors are When set, error special effects are executed when all errors including right-handed errors occur. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to set on the game hall side whether or not to notify even an error not related to the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and convenience is improved.

<Special effect processing 2 of hall computer>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing special effect processing 2 executed in hall computer 1100. This special effect process 2 is executed, for example, every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) in the timer interrupt process of the hall computer 1100, and information indicating that the advantageous state is executed from the slot machine 501 (bonus internal winning information, When special game information such as information on the number of games remaining on the ceiling) or information indicating that an error has occurred (error occurrence information) is received (collected), the slot machine 501 of the group to which the slot machine 501 that output the special game information belongs is managed. A process of transmitting special effect execution information for driving (actuating) the information input device 1212 to the island computer 1200 is executed.

  First, in step H301, it is determined whether or not there is a group to which the slot machine 501 belongs in the group type set in the gaming machine information setting process in step H104 described above. If there is no group to which the slot machine belongs (H301: NO), the current special effect process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a group to which the slot machine belongs (H301: YES), the process proceeds to step H302.

  Next, in step H302, it is determined whether or not the ceiling remaining game number information has been received. If the ceiling remaining game number information has not been received (H302: NO), the process proceeds to step H307. On the other hand, if the remaining ceiling game number information is received (H302: YES), in step H303, the slot machine 501 corresponding to the transmission source of the remaining ceiling game number information is selected from the slot progress data (see FIG. 71). The record is retrieved, and the ceiling remaining game number information (ceiling remaining game number information corresponding to the transmission source gaming machine) of the record is updated. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the information on the number of games remaining on the ceiling of each slot machine 501. Details of the slot progress data will be described later.

  Next, in step H304, the elapsed time from the previous special effect (in this case, the pre-special effect and the changing special effect are targeted) of the group (corresponding group) to which the slot machine 501 serving as the transmission source of the remaining ceiling game number information belongs. In step H305, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). If the elapsed time is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (H305: NO), the process proceeds to step H307. On the other hand, if the elapsed time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (H305: YES), in step H306, the advance special effect determination table for slots for determining whether or not to execute the advance special effect (see FIG. 72A). ) Is selected, and the process proceeds to step H314. Details of the slot special advance determination table will be described later.

  Next, in step H307, it is determined whether internal winning information has been received. If the internal winning information has not been received (H307: NO), the process proceeds to step H312. On the other hand, when the internal winning information is received (H307: YES), in step H308, the internal winning information is selected from the slot progress data (see FIG. 71) for managing the game progress information in each slot machine. The record corresponding to the transmission source slot machine 501 is searched, and the internal winning information (internal winning information corresponding to the transmission source gaming machine) of the record is updated. As a result, the internal winning information of each slot machine 501 can be grasped.

  Next, in step H309, refer to the elapsed time from the previous special effect (in this case, the pre-special effect and the special effect during change) of the group (corresponding group) to which the slot machine 501 as the transmission source of the internal winning information belongs. In step H310, it is determined whether the elapsed time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). If the elapsed time is not greater than or equal to the predetermined time (H310: NO), the process proceeds to step H312. On the other hand, if the elapsed time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (H310: YES), in step H311, the changing special effect determination table for the slot for determining whether to execute the changing special effect (FIG. 72 (b)). )) Is selected, and the process proceeds to step H314. Details of the changing special effect determination table for the slot will be described later.

  Next, in step H312, it is determined whether error occurrence information has been received. If the error occurrence information has not been received (H312: NO), the current special effect process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if error occurrence information has been received (H312: YES), in step H313, a slot error special effect determination table (see FIG. 72C) for determining whether or not to execute an error special effect. Select and move the process to step H314. Details of the slot error special effect determination table will be described later.

  Next, in step H314, special effect setting (special effect execution date, special effect execution period, special effect setting, etc.) and slot are set in the special effect determination table selected in any of step H306, step H311 and step H313. Check the game progress information stored in the progress data (such as information on the number of games remaining on the ceiling of the transmission source game machine, internal winning information, error occurrence information, etc.) Whether or not to execute special effects and error special effects) is determined.

  Next, in Step H315, it is determined whether or not to execute a special effect as a determination result in Step H314. When the special effect is not executed (H315: NO), the current special effect process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, when the special effect is executed (H315: YES), in step H316, the island computer 1200 (which manages the gaming machines of the group (corresponding group) to which the slot machine 501 serving as the transmission source of the special gaming information belongs is managed. The special effect execution information indicating the type of the group for executing the special effect, the type of the special effect, and the type of the input reception interface (input reception switch) for performing the input is transmitted to the island management apparatus. Thus, the island computer 1200 (island management device) that has received the special performance execution information drives (activates) the information input devices 1212 corresponding to each of the slot machines 501 of the group to which the slot machine 501 that is the transmission source of the special game information belongs. ) Is performed and a special effect is executed.

  Next, in step H317, it is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the pre-special effect or the special effect during change. If it is not determined to be executed (H317: NO), the current special effect process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined to be executed (H317: YES), in step H318, the current time is stored as the special effect time in the RAM of the HC control unit 1101, and the special effect process 2 of this time is terminated.

  As described above, when the elapsed time from the previous special effect (preliminary special effect, changing special effect) is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (10 minutes), the special effect is not executed and is executed by the slot machine 501. It is possible to prevent that the special effect in the middle does not end and the new special effect is not executed, and the effect of the special effect is reduced.

  Also, when receiving error occurrence information, the error special effect that should be executed first is not executed because the error special effect is executed regardless of the elapsed time from the previous special effect. This can be avoided, and the security of the slot machine 501 can be improved.

<Progress data for slot>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the contents of the progress data for slots stored in the hard disk 1104 (HDD) of the hall computer 1100 (in-house management device).

  The slot progress data is data for managing game progress information in each slot machine 501, and records corresponding to each of the slot machines 501 installed in the game hall are set. The data field is set.

  In the plurality of data fields, a machine number field in which a machine number for identifying the slot machine 501 in the game room is set, a game state of the slot machine 501 (normal game state, ART game state, AT game state, big bonus game) State, regular bonus game state, challenge bonus game state, etc.), game state field in which internal lottery processing results are stored, number of AT games in which the number of remaining AT games being executed is stored The field includes a ceiling remaining game number field in which the number of remaining games up to the ceiling game number is stored.

<Example of updating slot progress data>
Here, an example in which the record of the progress data for slot is updated when the hall computer 1100 (in-place management apparatus) receives (collects) various game information output from the slot machine 501 will be described. Here, it is assumed that game information is output from the 18th slot machine.

When the game state information indicating the normal game state is received, the game state in the game state field of the corresponding record is updated to “normal (normal game state)”.
When internal winning information indicating that the result of the internal lottery is a regular bonus combination and a small combination 1 is received, the internal winning information in the internal winning field of the corresponding record is updated to “RB, small combination 1”.

When the AT game number information indicating that the AT game number is “0” is received, the AT game number in the AT game number field of the corresponding record is updated to “0”.
When the ceiling remaining game number information indicating that the number of remaining ceiling games is “197” is received, the number of remaining ceiling games in the ceiling remaining game number field of the corresponding record is updated to “197”.

  As described above, the progress data for slots stored in the hard disk 1104 (HDD) of the hall computer 1100 (on-site management apparatus) is stored in a record in real time every time game information is received (collected) from the slot machine 501. The information that has been updated. Therefore, the hall computer 1100 can grasp the game progress information in each slot machine 501 by referring to the slot progress data.

<Preliminary special performance determination table for slots>
FIG. 72 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a slot special advance effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute an advance special effect on the basis of the number of remaining games on the ceiling. In the special effect process 2 described above, FIG. Referenced.

  The advance special effect determination table for slots includes the execution date of the special effect, the execution period of the special effect on the execution date, the current gaming state of the slot machine 501 that is the transmission source of the special game information, and the transmission source of the special game information. Information on the number of games remaining in the ceiling of the slot machine 501 and information on the number of games remaining in the ceiling of other slot machines 501 to which the slot machine 501 to which the slot machine 501 that is the source of the special game information belongs are sent. The setting, the distribution ratio of the determination result, and the determination result (the presence / absence of execution, the type of special effect to be executed) are associated with each other.

  According to the special special effect determination table for slots, the special special effect is executed on the date and time according to the execution date of the special effect and the execution period of the special effect on the execution date set by the employees of the game hall. become. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform a pre-special effect at the date and time that is at the amusement park side's intention.

  Also, according to the slot special advance effect determination table, the advance special effect can be executed when the current gaming state of the slot machine 501 serving as the transmission source of the special game information is the normal gaming state. However, prior special effects cannot be executed when a bonus game, an ART game, or an AT game is being played. By doing so, the execution frequency of the advance special effect is increased and the expectation for the advance special effect is not impaired, and the player's expectation that the AT game is executed is improved. It becomes possible.

  Also, according to the slot special advance effect determination table, the information on the number of remaining games on the ceiling of the slot machine 501 that is the source of the special game information is the predetermined number of games that can be executed by lending one unit of game media (here, 6 In the case of (game), a special special effect is executed in advance. By doing in this way, it can suppress that it is extended from execution of an advance special effect until an AT game is performed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of an advance special effect. Note that the special special effect is executed when the remaining ceiling game number information is 6 games, but it may be more or less than 6 games.

  Further, according to the slot special advance effect determination table, the information on the number of remaining games on the ceiling of other slot machines 501 of the group to which the slot machine 501 serving as the transmission source of the special game information belongs is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (here 21) The pre-special effects are executed at a higher rate when there are less than a predetermined number than when there are only the ones. By doing in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that there are a plurality of slot machines 501 in which the execution of the AT game is approaching, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the number of operating groups of the slot machine 501 to which the special game information is transmitted is less than a predetermined number (for example, four), other members of the group to which the slot machine 501 that is the transmission source of the special game information belongs. The special special effect is executed regardless of the information on the number of games remaining on the ceiling of the slot machine 501. When the number of operating machines is a predetermined number (four or more), the slot machine 501 serving as the transmission source of the special game information is A pre-special effect may be executable according to information on the number of remaining games on the ceiling of other slot machines 501 to which the group belongs. If it does in this way, even if it is a case where there are few operating numbers, a prior special effect will be performed with a certain frequency, and it will become possible to improve the interest of a prior special effect.

<Variable special effect judgment table for slots>
FIG. 72 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the changing special effect determination table for the slot for determining whether or not to execute the changing special effect based on the internal winning information. In the special effect process 2 described above, FIG. Referenced.

  The changing special effect determination table for the slot includes the execution date of the special effect, the execution period of the special effect on the execution date, the current gaming state of the slot machine 501 that is the source of the special game information, and the source of the special game information. Corresponding to the latest internal winning information of the slot machine 501 to be set, notification special effects (in this case, special effects during fluctuation), determination result distribution ratio, determination results (whether or not to execute, type of special effects to be executed) It is attached.

  According to the changing special effect determination table for the slot, the changing special effect is executed on the date and time according to the execution date of the special effect set by the employee of the game hall and the execution period of the special effect on the execution date. Will be. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform the special effect during a change in the date and time which suited the amusement hall side.

  Further, according to the changing special effect determination table for slots, when the current gaming state of the slot machine 501 that is the transmission source of the special game information is the normal gaming state or the AT game, the changing special effect is displayed. Although it can be executed, the special effect during change cannot be executed when the bonus game or the ART game is being played. By doing this, the frequency of execution of the special effects during the change will not increase, and the expectation for the special effects during the change will not be lost, and the player's expectation that the bonus game will be executed is reduced. It becomes possible to improve. Note that the changing special effect may be executed during the ART game, or the changing special effect may not be executed during the AT game.

  Further, according to the changing special effect determination table for slots, when the internal winning information of the slot machine 501 serving as the transmission source of the special game information is winning of a big bonus (BB) combination or a regular bonus (RB) combination. The special effects during the change can be executed, but the special effects during the change cannot be executed in the case of winning of the lost, small part, special part or challenge bonus (CB) part. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a bonus game advantageous to the player, such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, is executed when the special effect during change is executed, and the bonus game is executed. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for this. In the case of winning a challenge bonus (CB) role, the special special effect during change may be executable. In addition, the changing special effect may be executed only in the winning game of the big bonus, the regular bonus, or the challenge bonus, and the changing special effect may not be executed in the game in which the winning is carried over.

  In addition, according to the changing special effect determination table for slots, when the internal winning information of the slot machine 501 that is the source of the special game information is a big bonus, it changes at a higher rate than when it is a regular bonus. Medium special effects are executed (easy to be executed). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise the player's expectation that the big bonus is won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the special effect during the change is made possible when the challenge bonus is won, the regular bonus is more than the case where the internal winning information of the slot machine 501 as the transmission source of the special game information is the challenge bonus. In some cases, the changing special effect may be executed (easily executed) at a higher rate. In addition, the changing special effect is executed at a higher rate for the challenge bonus than the regular bonus, and the changing special effect is executed at a higher rate for the big bonus than the challenge bonus. You may make it do. Furthermore, in the case of a small role where the internal winning information is not duplicated in the bonus, the special effect during the change is impossible to execute, but at a lower rate (for example, 1%) than in the case where the bonus is not duplicated. Special effects may be executed while the gas is changing.

  In addition, even if the freeze winning information is received (collected), the special effect during the change is not executed, but when the freeze winning information is received (collected), the special during the change is announced to give an advance notice of the number of AT games to be added. (For example, a short effect for a short freeze, a long effect for a long freeze, or a uniform short effect) may be executed. When freeze end information is received (collected) during execution of the changing special effect, the changing special effect being executed may be ended, or the result of the changing special effect is derived at that timing. You may do it.

<Error special effect judgment table for slots>
FIG. 72 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an error special effect determination table for slots for determining the presence / absence of execution of an error special effect and the type of error special effect to be executed based on various types of error information. The special effect process 2 is referred to.

  The error special effect determination table for slots includes the execution date of the special effect, the execution period of the special effect on the execution date, the setting of the error special effect, and the type of error that has occurred in the slot machine 501 that is the source of the special game information. The determination results (the presence or absence of execution, the type of special effect to be executed) are associated with each other.

  According to the error special effect determination table for slots, the error special effect is executed on the date and time according to the execution date of the special effect and the execution period of the special effect on the execution date set by the employees of the game hall. become. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform an error special effect at the date and time that is in accordance with the intention of the game hall.

  According to the error special effect determination table for slots, even when only an important error is set by an amusement hall employee, the error special effect is executed when all errors occur. However, an error special effect may be executed when an error other than a predetermined error (for example, a reel error not related to security) occurs. In this way, it is possible to set on the game hall side whether or not to notify an error that is not related to the security of the slot machine 501, and convenience is improved.

<Island computer information input device drive processing>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an information input device driving process executed in the island computer 1200 (island management device). This information input device driving process is executed every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) in the timer interrupt process of the island computer 1200, for example.

  First, in step H1001, it is determined whether or not special performance execution information has been received. If the special effect execution information has not been received (H1001: NO), the current information input device driving process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special effect execution information is received (H1001: YES), in step H1002, the information input device 1212 corresponding to the input receiving device of the gaming machine belonging to the group included in the received special effect execution information is displayed as a special. The operation is performed in a manner corresponding to the type of the special effect and the type of the input reception interface included in the effect execution information, and the current information input device driving process is terminated.

  For example, when special effect execution information indicating execution of a pre-read special effect or a pre-special effect is received, a first input (first by an actuator) to the information input device 1212 corresponding to the gaming machine belonging to the corresponding group. A drive signal for pressing the input receiving switches 87a and 523a is output. When special effect execution information indicating execution of the special effect during change is received, a second input (second input acceptance switch by an actuator) is input to the information input device 1212 corresponding to the gaming machine belonging to the corresponding group. 87b and 523b) is output. When special effect execution information indicating execution of the error special effect is received, a third input (third input acceptance switch 87c by an actuator) is input to the information input device 1212 corresponding to the gaming machine belonging to the corresponding group. A driving signal for performing the pressing of 523c is output.

  As described above, when the special effect execution information is received, the information input device 1212 corresponding to the gaming machines belonging to the corresponding group is operated to cause the plurality of gaming machines to execute the special effects all at once. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suggest / notify that an advantageous state is executed or an error has occurred, and it is possible to improve the appeal of special effects.

  In addition, when a plurality of gaming machines belong to the corresponding group, each information input device 1212 is operated so that the execution start timing of special effects executed by each gaming machine is slightly shifted (for example, 0.5 seconds). The information input device 1212 may be actuated by randomly determining whether to start the special effects all at once or to start the special effects little by little. Each information input device 1212 may be operated so that the start timing of the special effect is slightly shifted (for example, 0.5 seconds) between the gaming machine that transmitted the special gaming information to be different from the other gaming machines.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not limited to a so-called probability change machine in which the probability change game state continues from the end of the jackpot game to the next jackpot game, and changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot game. A so-called ST machine called a pachinko game machine in which the probability variation game state continues until the display is executed, and a variation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is made after the jackpot game is ended by winning a game ball to a specific area in the jackpot game. A pachinko machine called a so-called V-like ST machine in which the probability variation gaming state continues until it is executed, or a so-called pachinko game machine called so-called wings, in which a jackpot game is executed by winning a game ball in a specific area with a small hit May be. Further, it may be a sparrow ball game machine, an arrange ball game machine, or an enclosed ball game machine that plays a game using a game ball sealed inside.

  Further, the slot machine 501 of the present embodiment assists in establishing a winning combination by notifying at least the stop operation order of each reel stop switch 514a, 514b, 514c, winning symbols, etc. Is not limited to a slot machine in which the A (R) T game is executed.

  The gaming system 1000 of the present embodiment is not limited to a gaming system in which the island computer 1200 transmits gaming information collected from the information display device 1300 to the hall computer, and corresponds to one or two gaming devices YS. The gaming computer may be a gaming system in which a gaming computer that collects gaming information from the information display device 1300 transmits the gaming information to the hall computer 1100, or the information collected from the gaming device YS may be May be a gaming system that transmits to the hall computer 1100, or may be a gaming system in which the information display device 1300 transmits the gaming information collected from the gaming apparatus YS to the hall computer 1100. , Game information collected from the gaming device YS The game system may be such that the data is transmitted to the hall computer 1100, or the game information collected from the gaming device YS is transmitted to the island computer 1200 without the hall computer 1100 provided by the information display device 1300 or the stand computer. The game system may be a game system in which the game computer collected from the information display device 1300 is simply transmitted to the island computer 1200 by the game computer. Moreover, the game system which controls execution of a special effect with the island computer 1200 may be sufficient, and the game system which controls execution of a special effect with the information display apparatus 1300 or a stand computer may be sufficient. Further, the information display device 1300 or the stand computer that has received the special performance execution information from the hall computer 1100, the island computer 1200, or the like may operate the information input device 1212.

  Moreover, it should be thought that embodiment disclosed this time is an illustration and restrictive at no points. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 5 Game board 44 Normal winning opening 45 1st starting opening 46 2nd starting opening 51 General gate 54 Large winning opening 71 First image display device 72 Second image display device 86 External output terminal board 100 Main control device 200 payout control device 300 sub control device 501 slot machine 507 effect lamp 509 liquid crystal display 510 reel unit 600 control device 630 role lottery means 730 payout control means 750 information output means 1000 game system 1100 hall computer 1200 island computer 1212 information input Device 1250 Production device 1251 Production display device 1252 Production speaker 1300 Information display device 1311 TC display device 1312 TC speaker 1313 TC light emitting unit 1350 Lending device 1400 Checkout device 1500 Ball jet counter 1 00 medal jet counter 1700 prize management device

Claims (3)

In a gaming apparatus that receives information output from a gaming machine that executes a specific effect when an input is received at an input receiving unit provided at a position where the player is difficult or impossible to operate,
An input means for inputting to the input receiving unit;
Determination means for determining whether or not specific information that triggers the input is received;
Input execution means for causing the input means to perform input based on the determination that the specific information has been received , and
The gaming device receives information output from a plurality of gaming machines,
A plurality of the input means are provided so as to correspond to each of a plurality of gaming machines,
The gaming device according to claim 1, wherein the input execution unit causes the input unit corresponding to at least the gaming machine that outputs the specific information to perform input. A classification means for classifying a plurality of gaming machines into any of a plurality of groups,
2. The gaming apparatus according to claim 1 , wherein the input execution means causes the input means corresponding to the gaming machines classified into a group to which the gaming machine that has output the specific information belongs to perform input all at once. . The gaming apparatus according to claim 1 , wherein the input execution unit causes the input unit to perform different inputs according to the type of the specific information collected from the gaming machines.

Images